WO2024085129A1 - Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station - Google Patents

Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024085129A1
WO2024085129A1 PCT/JP2023/037483 JP2023037483W WO2024085129A1 WO 2024085129 A1 WO2024085129 A1 WO 2024085129A1 JP 2023037483 W JP2023037483 W JP 2023037483W WO 2024085129 A1 WO2024085129 A1 WO 2024085129A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
serving cell
candidate
information
unit
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/037483
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
祐輝 松村
聡 永田
ジン ワン
ラン チン
Original Assignee
株式会社Nttドコモ
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社Nttドコモ filed Critical 株式会社Nttドコモ
Publication of WO2024085129A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024085129A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/26Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by agreed or negotiated communication parameters
    • H04W36/28Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by agreed or negotiated communication parameters involving a plurality of connections, e.g. multi-call or multi-bearer connections
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0457Variable allocation of band or rate

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to terminals, wireless communication methods, and base stations in next-generation mobile communication systems.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • Non-Patent Document 1 LTE-Advanced (3GPP Rel. 10-14) was specified for the purpose of achieving higher capacity and greater sophistication over LTE (Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP (registered trademark)) Release (Rel.) 8, 9).
  • LTE 5th generation mobile communication system
  • 5G+ 5th generation mobile communication system
  • 6G 6th generation mobile communication system
  • NR New Radio
  • E-UTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
  • E-UTRAN Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • TRPs Transmission/Reception Points
  • MTRPs Multi-TRPs
  • DL downlink
  • UE User Equipment
  • one of the objectives of this disclosure is to provide a terminal, a wireless communication method, and a base station that can appropriately perform settings/processing during a cell switch.
  • a terminal is characterized by having a receiver that receives a cell switch command for a special cell (SpCell) via Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling, and a controller that makes different assumptions about the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell.
  • SpCell special cell
  • L1/L2 Layer 1/Layer 2
  • settings/processing can be performed appropriately when switching the cell.
  • FIGS. 1A to 1D are diagrams showing examples of the configuration of a multi-TRP.
  • 2A is a diagram showing an example of UE movement in Rel. 17.
  • FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of UE movement in Rel. 18.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of association between a serving cell and a candidate cell.
  • 4A is a diagram showing a first example of a ServingCellConfig of option 1.
  • FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a second example of a ServingCellConfig of option 1.
  • FIG. 5 shows a first example of option 2.
  • 6A is a diagram showing a second example of option 2.
  • FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a third example of option 2.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a serving cell switch example 1.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a serving cell switch example 2.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a serving cell switch example 3.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a serving cell configuration according to aspect 1.1.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a serving cell configuration according to aspect 1.2.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of setting a cell type in embodiment 2.1.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment.
  • Multi-TRP In NR, one or more transmission/reception points (TRPs) (multi-TRPs) are considered to perform DL transmission to a UE using one or more panels (multi-panels). It is also considered that a UE performs UL transmission to one or more TRPs.
  • TRPs transmission/reception points
  • multiple TRPs may correspond to the same cell identifier (cell identifier (ID)) or different cell IDs.
  • the cell ID may be a physical cell ID (PCI) or a virtual cell ID.
  • FIGS 1A-1D show examples of multi-TRP scenarios. In these examples, we assume, but are not limited to, that each TRP is capable of transmitting four different beams.
  • FIG. 1A shows an example of a case where only one TRP (TRP1 in this example) of the multi-TRP transmits to the UE (which may be called single mode, single TRP, etc.).
  • TRP1 transmits both a control signal (PDCCH) and a data signal (PDSCH) to the UE.
  • PDCCH control signal
  • PDSCH data signal
  • FIG. 1B shows an example of a case where only one TRP (TRP1 in this example) of the multi-TRP transmits a control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (which may be called a single master mode).
  • the UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on one downlink control information (Downlink Control Information (DCI)).
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • FIG. 1C shows an example of a case where each of the multi-TRPs transmits a part of a control signal to the UE and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (which may be called a master-slave mode).
  • TRP1 may transmit part 1 of the control signal (DCI) and TRP2 may transmit part 2 of the control signal (DCI).
  • Part 2 of the control signal may depend on part 1.
  • the UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on these parts of DCI.
  • FIG. 1D shows an example of a case where each of the multi-TRPs transmits a separate control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (which may be called a multi-master mode).
  • a first control signal (DCI) may be transmitted from TRP1
  • a second control signal (DCI) may be transmitted from TRP2.
  • the UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on these DCIs.
  • the DCI may be called a single DCI (S-DCI, single PDCCH). Also, when multiple PDSCHs from a multi-TRP such as that shown in FIG. 1D are scheduled using multiple DCIs, these multiple DCIs may be called multiple DCIs (M-DCI, multiple PDCCHs).
  • Each TRP in a multi-TRP may transmit a different Transport Block (TB)/Code Word (CW)/different layer.
  • TB Transport Block
  • CW Code Word
  • each TRP in a multi-TRP may transmit the same TB/CW/layer.
  • Non-Coherent Joint Transmission is being considered as one form of multi-TRP transmission.
  • TRP1 modulates and maps a first codeword, and transmits a first PDSCH using a first number of layers (e.g., two layers) and a first precoding by layer mapping.
  • TRP2 modulates and maps a second codeword, and transmits a second PDSCH using a second number of layers (e.g., two layers) and a second precoding by layer mapping.
  • multiple PDSCHs (multi-PDSCHs) that are NCJTed may be defined as partially or completely overlapping with respect to at least one of the time and frequency domains.
  • the first PDSCH from the first TRP and the second PDSCH from the second TRP may overlap with each other in at least one of the time and frequency resources.
  • the first PDSCH and the second PDSCH may be assumed to be not quasi-co-located (QCL). Reception of multiple PDSCHs may be interpreted as simultaneous reception of PDSCHs that are not of a certain QCL type (e.g., QCL type D).
  • QCL type D e.g., QCL type D
  • PDSCH transport block (TB) or codeword (CW) repetition across multi-TRP is supported. It is considered that repetition methods (URLLC schemes, e.g., schemes 1, 2a, 2b, 3, 4) across multi-TRP in the frequency domain, layer (spatial) domain, or time domain are supported.
  • URLLC schemes e.g., schemes 1, 2a, 2b, 3, 4
  • multi-PDSCH from multi-TRP is space division multiplexed (SDM).
  • SDM space division multiplexed
  • FDM frequency division multiplexed
  • RV redundancy version
  • the RV may be the same or different for multi-TRP.
  • multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are time division multiplexed (TDM).
  • TDM time division multiplexed
  • multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are transmitted in one slot.
  • multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are transmitted in different slots.
  • Such a multi-TRP scenario allows for more flexible transmission control using channels with better quality.
  • NCJT using multiple TRPs/panels may use high rank.
  • both single DCI single PDCCH, e.g., FIG. 1B
  • multiple DCI multiple PDCCH, e.g., FIG. 1D
  • the maximum number of TRPs may be 2.
  • TCI extension For single PDCCH design (mainly for ideal backhaul), TCI extension is being considered.
  • Each TCI code point in the DCI may correspond to TCI state 1 or 2.
  • the TCI field size may be the same as that of Rel. 15.
  • the serving cell may be read as a TRP in the serving cell.
  • Layer 1/layer 2 (L1/L2) and DCI/Medium Access Control Control Element (MAC CE) may be read as each other.
  • MAC CE DCI/Medium Access Control Control Element
  • a PCI different from the physical cell identity (PCI) of the current serving cell may be simply described as a "different PCI".
  • a non-serving cell, a cell having a different PCI, and an additional cell may be read as each other.
  • Scenario 1 corresponds to, for example, multi-TRP inter-cell mobility, but it may also be a scenario that does not correspond to multi-TRP inter-cell mobility.
  • the UE receives from the serving cell the configuration necessary to use radio resources for data transmission and reception, including an SSB configuration for beam measurement of a TRP corresponding to a PCI different from that of the serving cell, and resources of the different PCI.
  • the UE performs beam measurements of TRPs corresponding to different PCIs and reports the beam measurement results to the serving cell.
  • the Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states associated with the TRPs corresponding to different PCIs are activated by L1/L2 signaling from the serving cell.
  • the UE transmits and receives using UE-specific (dedicated) channels on TRPs corresponding to different PCIs.
  • the UE must always cover the serving cell, including in the case of multi-TRP.
  • the UE must use common channels (Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH), Paging Channel (PCH)) from the serving cell, as in the conventional system.
  • BCCH Broadcast Control Channel
  • PCH Paging Channel
  • scenario 1 when the UE transmits and receives signals to and from an additional cell/TRP (a TRP corresponding to the PCI of the additional cell), the serving cell (the serving cell assumption in the UE) is not changed.
  • the UE is configured with higher layer parameters related to the PCI of the non-serving cell from the serving cell. Scenario 1 may be applied, for example, in Rel. 17.
  • FIG 2A shows an example of UE movement in Rel. 17.
  • the UE moves from a cell with PCI #1 (serving cell) to a cell with PCI #3 (additional cell) (which overlaps with the serving cell).
  • the serving cell is not switched by L1/L2.
  • the additional cell is a cell with an additional PCI that is different from the PCI of the serving cell.
  • the UE can receive/transmit UE-specific (dedicated) channels from the additional cell.
  • the UE needs to be within the coverage of the serving cell to receive UE common channels (e.g., system information/paging/short messages).
  • ⁇ Scenario 2> L1/L2 inter-cell mobility is applied.
  • the serving cell can be changed using a function such as beam control without RRC reconfiguration.
  • transmission and reception with an additional cell is possible without handover. Since handover requires RRC reconnection and creates a period during which data communication is not possible, by applying L1/L2 inter-cell mobility that does not require handover, data communication can be continued even when the serving cell is changed.
  • the following procedure is performed.
  • the UE receives SSB configuration of a cell (additional cell) with a different PCI from the serving cell for beam measurement/serving cell change.
  • the UE performs beam measurements of cells using different PCIs and reports the measurement results to the serving cell.
  • the UE may receive a configuration of a cell having a different PCI (serving cell configuration) by higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC). That is, a pre-configuration regarding a serving cell change is performed. This configuration may be performed together with the configuration in (1) or may be performed separately.
  • the TCI states of cells with different PCIs are activated by L1/L2 signaling according to the change of serving cell.
  • the activation of the TCI state and the change of serving cell may be performed separately.
  • the UE changes the serving cell (assumed serving cell) and starts receiving/transmitting using a preconfigured UE-specific (dedicated) channel and TCI state.
  • scenario 2 the serving cell (the assumed serving cell in the UE) is updated by L1/L2 signaling.
  • Scenario 2 may be applied in Rel. 18.
  • Figure 2B shows an example of UE movement in Rel. 18.
  • the serving cell is switched by L1/L2.
  • the UE can receive/transmit UE-specific/common channels to/from the new serving cell.
  • the UE may move out of the coverage of the previous serving cell.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the association between a serving cell and a candidate cell.
  • SpCell#0, SCell#1, or SCell#2 is assumed to be a serving cell.
  • SpCell means a special cell (including a primary cell (PCell) and a primary secondary cell (PSCell)).
  • SCell means a secondary cell.
  • SpCell#0 is associated with candidate cell#0-1, candidate cell#0-2, and candidate cell#0-3.
  • SCell#1 is associated with candidate cell#1-1.
  • SCell#2 is associated with candidate cell#2-1, 2-2. In this way, one or more candidate cells (candidate serving cells) may be associated with a serving cell.
  • the following options 1 and 2 can be considered for setting candidate cells (candidate cells).
  • the information in ServingCellConfig may include information about multiple candidate cells, which need to share the same PDCCH/PDSCH/UL etc. configurations as the serving cell.
  • CSI-RS settings for CSI/TRS
  • CSI/TRS cell-specific CSI-RS settings
  • FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a first example of ServingCellConfig for option 1.
  • the ServingCellConfig includes configurations for additional cells (candidate cells).
  • FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a second example of ServingCellConfig for option 1.
  • the ServingCellConfig includes configurations for additional cells (candidate cells) for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • FIG. 4A corresponds, for example, to the above-mentioned scenario 1.
  • FIG. 4B corresponds, for example, to the above-mentioned scenario 2.
  • the candidate cells are pre-configured by the RRC.
  • the candidate cells may be fixed to be activated/deactivated in the specification, or may be configured to be activated/deactivated by the RRC.
  • the candidate cells for the L1/L2 cell switch may be activated/deactivated by the MAC CE.
  • the L1/L2 cell switch indication may be sent only from the active cell.
  • Multiple candidate cells may be associated with each serving cell by reusing the carrier aggregation (CA) configuration framework, with a complete configuration (e.g., ServingCellConfig) corresponding to each cell.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the UE is provided with the complete configuration for each candidate cell, so that it can communicate properly with the candidate cells.
  • the CA configuration framework it is possible to configure an SpCell for each cell group and add multiple SCells.
  • a serving cell may be configured and multiple candidate cells may be configured for each cell group for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility ( Figure 5).
  • Candidate cells may be activated/deactivated by the MAC CE. This method is considered to be beneficial to reduce the complexity of UE operations.
  • the CellGroupConfig for cell group ID 0 is shown.
  • FIG. 6A shows a second example of Option 2.
  • a common candidate cell pool for cell switching in the MCG/SCG is applied to the candidate cells.
  • the candidate cells are treated as one pool (group) regardless of the frequency band.
  • Figure 6B is a diagram showing a third example of Option 2.
  • multiple cell groups are configured, and cell group switching is possible by L1/L2 signaling.
  • Candidate cells are configured for each cell group, and the configuration of each group includes the indexes of the corresponding SpCell and SCell.
  • the CellGroupConfig in Figure 6B shows the CellGroupConfig for cell group ID: 1 as an example, but the CellGroupConfig for cell group IDs: 2 and 3 are also configured separately.
  • Implicit or explicit signaling for serving cell change indication is described.
  • a particular Control Resource Set (e.g., at least one of CORESET#0, CORESET of CH5 Type0-CSS, CORESET of CH6/CH7/CH8 CSS) is indicated (activated) by a MAC CE together with one or more TCI states associated with a cell of a PCI different from that of the serving cell (when, for a particular CORESET, one or more TCI states associated with a cell of a PCI different from that of the serving cell are indicated/activated by a MAC CE), the UE may determine to change the serving cell to another cell (cell x, a cell with a different PCI). That is, this activation may implicitly indicate changing the serving cell to another cell.
  • CORESET Control Resource Set
  • the UE may update beams of other CORESET IDs, other CORESETs using CH6/CH7/CH8, or other CORESETs using CSS to the same TCI state as the activated TCI state.
  • the UE may determine to change the serving cell to another cell (cell x), i.e., the association may implicitly indicate the change of the serving cell to another cell.
  • the NW base station
  • the MAC CE activates the TCI state of a PDSCH associated with a cell with a different PCI, it must also include the TCI state related to another cell (e.g., the current serving cell or a cell with a second different PCI).
  • the UE may determine to change the serving cell to another cell (cell x), i.e., the association may implicitly indicate the serving cell change to another cell.
  • Option 2-1 An example of a serving cell change instruction will be described below. Note that activation/deactivation of a non-serving cell, change of a serving cell, and transmission/reception with another cell (non-serving cell) having a physical cell ID different from the physical cell ID of the serving cell may be read as interchangeable.
  • the UE may receive a new MAC CE including at least one of the fields (information) indicating the following (1) to (3) corresponding to the non-serving cell, which is used for activating/deactivating the non-serving cell.
  • the UE may decide to change the serving cell to another cell (non-serving cell).
  • the UE may also control transmission and reception of DL signals/UL signals with the non-serving cell based on the information.
  • the non-serving cell may be one or multiple. In the example shown below, a MAC CE including multiple fields indicating multiple non-serving cell indexes is applied.
  • Non-serving cell ID used for activation The non-serving cell ID may be replaced with any information corresponding to a non-serving cell (capable of identifying a non-serving cell).
  • any of (3-1) to (3-5) may be applied.
  • (3-1) PCI PCI used directly). For example, 10 bits are used.
  • CSI resource configuration ID (CSI-ResourceConfigId) (when CSI-ResourceConfigId corresponds to one or more non-serving cells).
  • CSI-ResourceConfigId (when CSI-ResourceConfigId corresponds to one or more non-serving cells).
  • 3-5 A bitmap indicating the activation/deactivation of each non-serving cell.
  • the size (number of bits) of the bitmap may be the same as the number of non-serving cells configured on this CC. For example, when activating the second non-serving cell among three non-serving cells, "010" is set.
  • At least one of the pieces of information included in the MAC CE may be included in the DCI. Or, at least one of the serving cells activated by the MAC CE may be indicated by the DCI.
  • the MAC CE/DCI may include a field indicating the TCI status/SSB/CSI-RS from a cell with a different PCI so that the UE can recognize the DL beam to be monitored on the target cell (the serving cell after the change).
  • the UE may create and transmit a beam report (CSI report) using the TCI status/SSB/CSI-RS.
  • the UE may receive a MAC CE in which a new 1-bit field "C" is added to the existing MAC CE.
  • the field indicates whether to change the serving cell.
  • the UE may receive the MAC CE and determine whether to change the serving cell to another cell based on the field.
  • a field indicating the serving cell index/PCI/other ID (such as the new ID in Option 2-1 described above) and a field indicating the TCI state/SSB/CSI-RS of the target cell (the serving cell after the change) may be included in the MAC CE.
  • the UE can appropriately change the serving cell.
  • [Serving Cell Switch Example 1] 7 is a diagram showing a serving cell switch example 1.
  • the candidate cell #0-2 becomes the new serving cell SpCell#0.
  • the serving cell SCell#2 of the MCG/SCG when the serving cell is instructed to be changed to the candidate cell #2-1 by L1/L2 signaling, the candidate cell #2-1 becomes the new serving cell SCell#2.
  • the RRC/MAC CE can configure a global candidate cell ID (cell #0,...,5) for each cell group, band, FR, and UE.
  • the UE may be instructed to switch serving cells by the global candidate cell ID.
  • Figure 8 shows a serving cell switch example 2.
  • a pool of multiple candidate cells can be configured, and the serving cell can be switched to any (activated) candidate cell in the pool by L1/L2 signaling.
  • the configured candidate cell can be either an SpCell or a Sell based on L1/L2 signaling.
  • the UE may receive an instruction to change the serving cell (from cell #2-1 to candidate cell #4) via MAC CE/DCI. Then, the indicated candidate cell #4 becomes the SpCell of the new cell group.
  • the RRC/MAC CE can set a global candidate cell ID (cell #0-1, #0-1, ..., 2-2) for each cell group, band, FR, and UE.
  • the UE may be instructed to switch the serving cell by the global candidate cell ID.
  • Figure 9 shows serving cell switch example 3.
  • the UE receives an instruction to change the serving cell (from cell #2-0 to cell #2-1) via MAC CE/DCI.
  • the indicated cell #2-1 then becomes the SpCell of the new cell group.
  • the cells (cell #0-0, cell #1-0) in the same cell group as the indicated cell #2-1 become Scell #1 and Scell #2. In other words, the serving cell group is switched.
  • the inventors therefore came up with the idea of a terminal, a wireless communication method, and a base station that can properly perform settings/processing during a cell switch.
  • A/B and “at least one of A and B” may be interpreted as interchangeable. Also, in this disclosure, “A/B/C” may mean “at least one of A, B, and C.”
  • Radio Resource Control RRC
  • RRC parameters RRC parameters
  • RRC messages higher layer parameters, fields, information elements (IEs), settings, etc.
  • IEs information elements
  • CE Medium Access Control
  • update commands activation/deactivation commands, etc.
  • higher layer signaling may be, for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, or any combination thereof.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • the MAC signaling may use, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc.
  • the broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), Remaining Minimum System Information (RMSI), Other System Information (OSI), etc.
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • SIB System Information Block
  • RMSI Remaining Minimum System Information
  • OSI System Information
  • the physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI), etc.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • UCI Uplink Control Information
  • index identifier
  • indicator indicator
  • resource ID etc.
  • sequence list, set, group, cluster, subset, pool, etc.
  • TRP
  • the spatial relationship information identifier (ID) (TCI state ID) and the spatial relationship information (TCI state) may be read as interchangeable.
  • ID spatial relationship information
  • TCI state and TCI may be read as interchangeable.
  • cell group serving cell group, master cell group (MCG), and secondary cell group (SCG) may be interchangeable.
  • L1/L2, L1/L2 signaling, and DCI/MAC CE may be interchangeable.
  • a serving cell may be replaced with a cell that transmits a PDSCH.
  • a candidate cell may refer to a cell that is a candidate to become a serving cell through L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • cell, PCI, serving cell, SpCell, source serving cell, CC, BWP, BWP in CC, band may be interchanged.
  • additional cell, other cell, non-serving cell, cell with a different PCI, candidate cell, candidate serving cell, cell with a PCI different from the PCI of the current serving cell, another serving cell, target cell, neighboring cell may be interchanged.
  • switch, change, update may be interchanged.
  • Serving cell may be interchanged with serving cell before switch or serving cell after switch.
  • Serving cell SpCell, PSCell, PCell, and SCell may be interchangeable.
  • Cell switch command, cell change instruction, and serving cell change instruction may be interchangeable.
  • the UE may receive a setting/indication/parameter indicating whether the serving cell can be a candidate cell for layer 1/layer 2 (L1/L2) inter-cell mobility by higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling, and may control the switch of the serving cell based on the setting/indication/parameter.
  • L1/L2 layer 1/layer 2
  • the UE may receive, via higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling, configurations/indications/parameters for each cell group (MCG/SCG) indicating whether all serving cells in the cell group can be candidate cells (or candidates for target SpCell/SCell) for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility, i.e., the UE may receive a (single) configuration/indication/parameter common to all serving cells in the cell group.
  • MCG/SCG higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling
  • the setting/instruction/parameter common to the serving cell indicates "No" (there is no cell that can be a candidate cell)
  • only candidate cells that have been set in advance by RRC signaling, etc. are applied as candidate cells.
  • type C cells which will be described later, do not need to be applied as candidate cells.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a serving cell in aspect 1.1.
  • the UE receives a configuration/instruction/parameter indicating that a cell group including SpCell#0, SCell#1, and SCell#2 can be a candidate cell for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • candidate cells #3 to #7 may be configured in advance as candidate cells by RRC signaling, etc.
  • the UE may receive configurations/indications/parameters via higher layer/physical layer signaling indicating whether each serving cell/CC in a cell group (MCG/SCG) can be a candidate cell (or a candidate for the target SpCell/SCell) for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility, i.e., the UE may receive separate configurations/indications/parameters for each serving cell.
  • MCG/SCG higher layer/physical layer signaling indicating whether each serving cell/CC in a cell group (MCG/SCG) can be a candidate cell (or a candidate for the target SpCell/SCell) for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility, i.e., the UE may receive separate configurations/indications/parameters for each serving cell.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a serving cell in aspect 1.2.
  • the UE receives a configuration/instruction/parameter indicating that SCell#1 can be a candidate cell for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • the UE may receive a configuration/instruction/parameter indicating that SpCell#0 and SCell#2 cannot be candidate cells for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • candidate cells #3 to #7 may be configured in advance to be candidate cells by RRC signaling, etc.
  • the candidate cell set in the cell group may be included in both the candidate cell pools (groups) of the SpCell cell switch of the L1/L2 inter-cell mobility and the Scell cell switch of the L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • the serving cell that is the candidate cell may be switched to the SpCell or the Scell.
  • the UE may transmit (report) UE capability information indicating that it supports a serving cell (SpCell/SCell) as a candidate cell (can be a candidate cell). For example, when aspect 1.1 is applied, the UE may transmit UE capability information indicating that it supports all serving cells in a cell group as candidate cells. For example, when aspect 1.2 is applied, the UE may transmit UE capability information indicating that it supports each serving cell in a cell group as a candidate cell (can be a candidate cell).
  • the UE receives the cell switch command for the SpCell through L1/L2 signaling and may make different assumptions about the activation/deactivation status of a candidate cell (target cell) based on the type of the candidate cell.
  • the UE may keep/store/maintain the RRC settings of the current SCell and the RRC settings of the candidate cells, unless it receives an RRC reconfiguration signal.
  • the cell switch may be either a single cell switch, a multi-cell switch or a cell group switch.
  • Type A SpCell.
  • Type B An Scell that is not designated as a candidate cell.
  • Type C Scell designated as a candidate cell.
  • Type D Candidate cell configured by RRC (not the original SCell).
  • the UE may assume that the activation/deactivation status of each type-D cell remains unchanged, and thus sequential L1/L2 cell changes may be possible.
  • the UE may receive an indication of activation/deactivation of each type D cell in the same signaling (concurrent signaling) as the cell switch command.
  • the candidate cell (target cell, the cell that will become the new SpCell) may be activated when it becomes the new SpCell, regardless of whether an activation signal is present.
  • the UE may assume that the activation/deactivation status of each type-B cell remains unchanged.
  • ⁇ Option 4B>> The UE may assume that each type-B cell is deactivated if it does not receive a new activation/deactivation instruction.
  • the UE may receive an indication of activation/deactivation of each type-B cell in the same signaling (concurrent signaling) as the cell switch command.
  • the UE may assume that the activation/deactivation status of each type-C cell remains unchanged.
  • the UE may assume that each Type-C cell has been deactivated if it does not receive a new activation/deactivation instruction.
  • the UE may receive activation/deactivation indications for each type-C cell in the same signaling (concurrent signaling) as the cell switch command.
  • the SpCell of type A becomes a candidate cell of type D.
  • the UE may assume that the state of the cell is activated or deactivated, or the UE may be instructed to activate/deactivate the cell by the cell switch command.
  • Case b is a case where the cell switch command for the SpCell is sent by L1/L2 signaling and the candidate cell (target cell, the cell that will become the new SpCell) is a type C SCell.
  • the UE may assume that the state of the target cell, the type C SCell, is activated because it will become the new SpCell, regardless of the presence or absence of activation signaling.
  • each option in case a may be applied similarly.
  • the cell switch command may include an indication of the activation/deactivation status of each candidate/serving cell, or the cell switch command may be sent to the UE together with said indication.
  • a bitmap may be used as the activation/deactivation indication.
  • each bit may indicate activation/deactivation of each candidate cell/each serving cell.
  • some or all cell indices may be explicitly indicated in the activation/deactivation indication. The transmission of a cell index may implicitly indicate activation/deactivation of that cell.
  • a signaling other than the activation/deactivation state indication may be used as the cell switch command.
  • the UE may be instructed only on the activation/deactivation state of specific/some cells (such as the source cell of the cell switch, type B cells, type C cells, type D cells, etc.).
  • the UE may transmit UE capability information indicating whether it supports updating the activation/deactivation status of other cells (candidate cells/serving cells) during a cell switch.
  • ⁇ Embodiment 2.2 not only activation/deactivation but also cell role change (e.g., serving cell/candidate cell, type A/B/C/D cell role) is described. For example, when a cell is switched, the target cell (candidate cell) becomes the serving cell and is also activated. For the original (pre-change) serving cell, the following options may be applied:
  • the original serving cell becomes the candidate cell.
  • the activation/deactivation may be determined based on embodiment 2.1.
  • the original serving cell remains the serving cell and may be activated/deactivated.
  • This option assumes the case, for example, where the roles of SpCell#0 and Scell#1 are swapped, with SpCell#0 becoming the Scell and Scell#1 becoming the new SpCell.
  • the original serving cell may become a type C cell or a type B cell.
  • the UE may also receive a specific signal indicating whether or not a cell role is changed.
  • the specific signal may be the same as the cell switch command/cell status indication, or may be a different signal.
  • the specific signal may indicate only whether or not the original serving cell (source cell) role is changed (e.g., whether or not to change to a candidate cell, whether or not to change to a type-C cell).
  • the specific indication may indicate a role change indication for multiple/all cells.
  • the original serving cell may undergo role changes, etc., depending on the type of the target cell.
  • the UE may exchange roles with the original serving cell and the target cell when the target cell is type B or type C.
  • the UE may not exchange roles with the original serving cell and the target cell when the target cell is type A or type D.
  • a specific index corresponding to the cell/PCI configured by the RRC may be indicated.
  • the specific index is, for example, an index associated with a part of the PCI.
  • the specific index is configured by the RRC to associate the PCI cell with a reconfiguration index.
  • the specific index has a reduced number of bits compared to the PCI, and therefore can facilitate indication of the cell using a bitmap in the MAC CE/DCI, etc.
  • the UE may retain the specific index, for example, a specific index "0" may or may not be for the current SpCell.
  • the UE may exchange the specific indexes of the original SpCell and the target cell, for example, the specific index "0" may be always set for the SpCell.
  • the UE may exchange the specific indexes of the serving cell and the target cell, where the index of the serving cell may always be smaller (lower) than the index of the candidate cell.
  • the cell switch command may indicate specific indices of some/all serving/candidate cells.
  • the indication of the specific indices may be included in the same signal as the cell switch command or in a separate signal (e.g., via MAC CE/DCI).
  • the UE may send UE capability information indicating that it supports the Option 4 feature.
  • Each embodiment may also be applicable to the cell group switch case (eg, FIG. 9).
  • the embodiments 2.1 and 2.2 may be applied to the cell group switch.
  • the following process may be performed.
  • the target cell group is activated.
  • the original (pre-change) serving cell group may be deactivated, may remain activated, or the activation/deactivation status may be explicitly indicated to the UE in new signaling.
  • Other candidate cell groups may be deactivated, their activation/deactivation may remain unchanged, or their activation/deactivation status may be explicitly indicated to the UE in new signaling.
  • Cell group activation/deactivation can be the same signal as cell group indication (switch indication) or a separate new signal (MAC CE/DCI).
  • the UE may be instructed to change the SpCell/Scell role for each cell group (or for a specific cell group, e.g., the target cell group).
  • the UE may send UE capability information regarding cell group activation/deactivation updates.
  • Embodiment 3 may be applied to a cell group switch.
  • a specific index may be replaced with a specific cell group index
  • a PCI may be replaced with a cell group index (original cell group index).
  • the cell group indexes of the serving cell group and the candidate cell group may be retained, switched (switch between the target cell group and the original serving cell group), or explicitly indicated to the UE by new signaling.
  • the UE may transmit UE capability information regarding the update of the cell group index.
  • any information may be notified to the UE (from a network (NW) (e.g., a base station (BS))) (in other words, any information is received by the UE from the BS) using physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, PDSCH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.
  • NW network
  • BS base station
  • the MAC CE may be identified by including a new Logical Channel ID (LCID) in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
  • LCID Logical Channel ID
  • the notification When the notification is made by a DCI, the notification may be made by a specific field of the DCI, a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) used to scramble Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) bits assigned to the DCI, the format of the DCI, etc.
  • RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
  • notification of any information to the UE in the above-mentioned embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
  • notification of any information from the UE (to the NW) may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., UCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.
  • physical layer signaling e.g., UCI
  • higher layer signaling e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE
  • a specific signal/channel e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signal
  • the MAC CE may be identified by including a new LCID in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
  • the notification may be transmitted using PUCCH or PUSCH.
  • notification of any information from the UE may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
  • At least one of the above-mentioned embodiments may be applied when a specific condition is satisfied, which may be specified in a standard or may be notified to a UE/BS using higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling.
  • At least one of the above-described embodiments may be applied only to UEs that have reported or support a particular UE capability.
  • the particular UE capability may indicate support for particular processing/operations/control/information for at least one of the above embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all frequencies (commonly regardless of frequency), capabilities per frequency (e.g., one or a combination of a cell, band, band combination, BWP, component carrier, etc.), capabilities per frequency range (e.g., Frequency Range 1 (FR1), FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2), capabilities per subcarrier spacing (SubCarrier Spacing (SCS)), or capabilities per Feature Set (FS) or Feature Set Per Component-carrier (FSPC).
  • FR1 Frequency Range 1
  • FR2 FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2
  • SCS subcarrier Spacing
  • FS Feature Set
  • FSPC Feature Set Per Component-carrier
  • the specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all duplexing methods (commonly regardless of the duplexing method), or may be capabilities for each duplexing method (e.g., Time Division Duplex (TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)).
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • At least one of the above-mentioned embodiments may be applied when the UE configures/activates/triggers specific information related to the above-mentioned embodiments (or performs the operations of the above-mentioned embodiments) by higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling.
  • the specific information may be any RRC parameters for a specific release (e.g., Rel. 18/19), etc.
  • the UE may, for example, apply Rel. 15/16 operations.
  • [Appendix 1] a receiving unit for receiving a configuration indicating whether a serving cell can be a candidate cell for Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) inter-cell mobility; A control unit that controls a switch of the serving cell based on the setting; A terminal having the above configuration.
  • [Appendix 2] The terminal according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the setting is a setting for each cell group indicating whether all the serving cells in the cell group can be the candidate cells for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • [Appendix 3] The terminal according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the setting indicates whether each serving cell in a cell group can be the candidate cell for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • [Appendix 4] The terminal according to any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the switch of the serving cell is a switch of the serving cell that is the candidate cell to a special cell (SpCell) or a secondary cell (SCell).
  • SpCell special cell
  • SCell secondary cell
  • [Appendix 1] a receiving unit for receiving a cell switch command of a special cell (SpCell) by Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling; A control unit that makes different assumptions about the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell; A terminal having the above configuration.
  • [Appendix 2] The terminal according to claim 1, wherein the control unit assumes that an activation or deactivation status of the candidate cell is not changed.
  • [Appendix 3] The terminal according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the receiving unit receives an instruction to activate or deactivate the candidate cell.
  • [Appendix 4] The terminal according to any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the receiving unit receives an index associated with a part of a physical cell index (PCI) for a serving cell and a candidate cell in a cell group.
  • PCI physical cell index
  • Wired communication system A configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described below.
  • communication is performed using any one of the wireless communication methods according to the above embodiments of the present disclosure or a combination of these.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment.
  • the wireless communication system 1 (which may simply be referred to as system 1) may be a system that realizes communication using Long Term Evolution (LTE) specified by the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio (5G NR), or the like.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
  • 5G NR 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio
  • the wireless communication system 1 may also support dual connectivity between multiple Radio Access Technologies (RATs) (Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC)).
  • MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
  • RATs Radio Access Technologies
  • MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
  • E-UTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
  • EN-DC E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity
  • NE-DC NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity
  • the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the master node (MN), and the NR base station (gNB) is the secondary node (SN).
  • the NR base station (gNB) is the MN, and the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the SN.
  • the wireless communication system 1 may support dual connectivity between multiple base stations within the same RAT (e.g., dual connectivity in which both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
  • dual connectivity in which both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
  • gNBs NR base stations
  • N-DC Dual Connectivity
  • the wireless communication system 1 may include a base station 11 that forms a macrocell C1 with a relatively wide coverage, and base stations 12 (12a-12c) that are arranged within the macrocell C1 and form a small cell C2 that is narrower than the macrocell C1.
  • a user terminal 20 may be located within at least one of the cells. The arrangement and number of each cell and user terminal 20 are not limited to the embodiment shown in the figure. Hereinafter, when there is no need to distinguish between the base stations 11 and 12, they will be collectively referred to as base station 10.
  • the user terminal 20 may be connected to at least one of the multiple base stations 10.
  • the user terminal 20 may utilize at least one of carrier aggregation (CA) using multiple component carriers (CC) and dual connectivity (DC).
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • CC component carriers
  • DC dual connectivity
  • Each CC may be included in at least one of a first frequency band (Frequency Range 1 (FR1)) and a second frequency band (Frequency Range 2 (FR2)).
  • Macro cell C1 may be included in FR1
  • small cell C2 may be included in FR2.
  • FR1 may be a frequency band below 6 GHz (sub-6 GHz)
  • FR2 may be a frequency band above 24 GHz (above-24 GHz). Note that the frequency bands and definitions of FR1 and FR2 are not limited to these, and for example, FR1 may correspond to a higher frequency band than FR2.
  • the user terminal 20 may communicate using at least one of Time Division Duplex (TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) in each CC.
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • the multiple base stations 10 may be connected by wire (e.g., optical fiber conforming to the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2 interface, etc.) or wirelessly (e.g., NR communication).
  • wire e.g., optical fiber conforming to the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2 interface, etc.
  • NR communication e.g., NR communication
  • base station 11 which corresponds to the upper station
  • IAB Integrated Access Backhaul
  • base station 12 which corresponds to a relay station
  • the base station 10 may be connected to the core network 30 directly or via another base station 10.
  • the core network 30 may include at least one of, for example, an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a 5G Core Network (5GCN), a Next Generation Core (NGC), etc.
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • 5GCN 5G Core Network
  • NGC Next Generation Core
  • the core network 30 may include network functions (Network Functions (NF)) such as, for example, a User Plane Function (UPF), an Access and Mobility management Function (AMF), a Session Management Function (SMF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), a Data Network (DN), a Location Management Function (LMF), and Operation, Administration and Maintenance (Management) (OAM).
  • NF Network Functions
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • AMF Access and Mobility management Function
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • UDM Unified Data Management
  • AF Application Function
  • DN Data Network
  • LMF Location Management Function
  • OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
  • the user terminal 20 may be a terminal that supports at least one of the communication methods such as LTE, LTE-A, and 5G.
  • a wireless access method based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing may be used.
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • CP-OFDM Cyclic Prefix OFDM
  • DFT-s-OFDM Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • the radio access method may also be called a waveform.
  • other radio access methods e.g., other single-carrier transmission methods, other multi-carrier transmission methods
  • a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, a broadcast channel (Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), etc. may be used as the downlink channel.
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)), a random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)), etc. may be used as an uplink channel.
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • SIB System Information Block
  • PDSCH User data, upper layer control information, System Information Block (SIB), etc.
  • SIB System Information Block
  • PUSCH User data, upper layer control information, etc.
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • Lower layer control information may be transmitted by the PDCCH.
  • the lower layer control information may include, for example, downlink control information (Downlink Control Information (DCI)) including scheduling information for at least one of the PDSCH and the PUSCH.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the DCI for scheduling the PDSCH may be called a DL assignment or DL DCI
  • the DCI for scheduling the PUSCH may be called a UL grant or UL DCI.
  • the PDSCH may be interpreted as DL data
  • the PUSCH may be interpreted as UL data.
  • a control resource set (COntrol REsource SET (CORESET)) and a search space may be used to detect the PDCCH.
  • the CORESET corresponds to the resources to search for DCI.
  • the search space corresponds to the search region and search method of PDCCH candidates.
  • One CORESET may be associated with one or multiple search spaces. The UE may monitor the CORESET associated with a search space based on the search space configuration.
  • a search space may correspond to PDCCH candidates corresponding to one or more aggregation levels.
  • One or more search spaces may be referred to as a search space set. Note that the terms “search space,” “search space set,” “search space setting,” “search space set setting,” “CORESET,” “CORESET setting,” etc. in this disclosure may be read as interchangeable.
  • the PUCCH may transmit uplink control information (UCI) including at least one of channel state information (CSI), delivery confirmation information (which may be called, for example, Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK), ACK/NACK, etc.), and a scheduling request (SR).
  • UCI uplink control information
  • CSI channel state information
  • HARQ-ACK Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement
  • ACK/NACK ACK/NACK
  • SR scheduling request
  • the PRACH may transmit a random access preamble for establishing a connection with a cell.
  • downlink, uplink, etc. may be expressed without adding "link.”
  • various channels may be expressed without adding "Physical” to the beginning.
  • a synchronization signal (SS), a downlink reference signal (DL-RS), etc. may be transmitted.
  • a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), a positioning reference signal (PRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), etc. may be transmitted.
  • the synchronization signal may be, for example, at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) and a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS).
  • a signal block including an SS (PSS, SSS) and a PBCH (and a DMRS for PBCH) may be called an SS/PBCH block, an SS Block (SSB), etc.
  • the SS, SSB, etc. may also be called a reference signal.
  • a measurement reference signal Sounding Reference Signal (SRS)
  • a demodulation reference signal DMRS
  • UL-RS uplink reference signal
  • DMRS may also be called a user equipment-specific reference signal (UE-specific Reference Signal).
  • the base station 14 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a base station according to an embodiment.
  • the base station 10 includes a control unit 110, a transceiver unit 120, a transceiver antenna 130, and a transmission line interface 140. Note that one or more of each of the control unit 110, the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission line interface 140 may be provided.
  • this example mainly shows the functional blocks of the characteristic parts of this embodiment, and the base station 10 may also be assumed to have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each part described below may be omitted.
  • the control unit 110 controls the entire base station 10.
  • the control unit 110 can be configured from a controller, a control circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
  • the control unit 110 may control signal generation, scheduling (e.g., resource allocation, mapping), etc.
  • the control unit 110 may control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140, measurement, etc.
  • the control unit 110 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 120.
  • the control unit 110 may perform call processing of communication channels (setting, release, etc.), status management of the base station 10, management of radio resources, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may include a baseband unit 121, a radio frequency (RF) unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
  • the baseband unit 121 may include a transmission processing unit 1211 and a reception processing unit 1212.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which the present disclosure relates.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmission unit and a reception unit.
  • the transmission unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 1211 and an RF unit 122.
  • the reception unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 1212, an RF unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
  • the transmitting/receiving antenna 130 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
  • the transceiver 120 may transmit the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver 120 may receive the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver 120 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
  • digital beamforming e.g., precoding
  • analog beamforming e.g., phase rotation
  • the transceiver 120 may perform Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer processing, Radio Link Control (RLC) layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), Medium Access Control (MAC) layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc., on data and control information obtained from the control unit 110, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • HARQ retransmission control HARQ retransmission control
  • the transceiver 120 may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • channel coding which may include error correction coding
  • DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • the transceiver unit 120 may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc., on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 130.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 130.
  • the transceiver 120 may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, and acquire user data, etc.
  • reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, and acquire user data, etc.
  • FFT Fast Fourier Transform
  • IDFT Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform
  • the transceiver 120 may perform measurements on the received signal.
  • the measurement unit 123 may perform Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurements, Channel State Information (CSI) measurements, etc. based on the received signal.
  • the measurement unit 123 may measure received power (e.g., Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)), received quality (e.g., Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)), signal strength (e.g., Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc.
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
  • the measurement results may be output to the control unit 110.
  • the transmission path interface 140 may transmit and receive signals (backhaul signaling) between devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes providing NF), other base stations 10, etc., and may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
  • devices included in the core network 30 e.g., network nodes providing NF
  • other base stations 10, etc. may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
  • the transmitting unit and receiving unit of the base station 10 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitting/receiving unit 120, the transmitting/receiving antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may also transmit a setting indicating whether the serving cell can be a candidate cell for Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) inter-cell mobility.
  • the control unit 110 may control the switch of the serving cell based on the setting.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may transmit a cell switch command for a special cell (SpCell) via Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling.
  • SpCell a special cell
  • L1/L2 Layer 1/Layer 2
  • the control unit 110 may perform different control over the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell.
  • the (User terminal) 15 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment.
  • the user terminal 20 includes a control unit 210, a transceiver unit 220, and a transceiver antenna 230. Note that the control unit 210, the transceiver unit 220, and the transceiver antenna 230 may each include one or more.
  • this example mainly shows the functional blocks of the characteristic parts of this embodiment, and the user terminal 20 may also be assumed to have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each part described below may be omitted.
  • the control unit 210 controls the entire user terminal 20.
  • the control unit 210 can be configured from a controller, a control circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
  • the control unit 210 may control signal generation, mapping, etc.
  • the control unit 210 may control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 220 and the transceiver antenna 230, measurement, etc.
  • the control unit 210 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 220.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may include a baseband unit 221, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
  • the baseband unit 221 may include a transmission processing unit 2211 and a reception processing unit 2212.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which the present disclosure relates.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmission unit and a reception unit.
  • the transmission unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 2211 and an RF unit 222.
  • the reception unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 2212, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
  • the transmitting/receiving antenna 230 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
  • the transceiver 220 may receive the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver 220 may transmit the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver 220 may form at least one of the transmit beam and receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
  • digital beamforming e.g., precoding
  • analog beamforming e.g., phase rotation
  • the transceiver 220 may perform PDCP layer processing, RLC layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), MAC layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on the data and control information acquired from the controller 210, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
  • RLC layer processing e.g., RLC retransmission control
  • MAC layer processing e.g., HARQ retransmission control
  • the transceiver 220 may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • Whether or not to apply DFT processing may be based on the settings of transform precoding.
  • the transceiver unit 220 transmission processing unit 2211
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform DFT processing as the above-mentioned transmission processing in order to transmit the channel using a DFT-s-OFDM waveform, and when transform precoding is not enabled, it is not necessary to perform DFT processing as the above-mentioned transmission processing.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc., on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 230.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 230.
  • the transceiver 220 may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
  • reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
  • the transceiver 220 may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 223 may perform RRM measurements, CSI measurements, etc. based on the received signal.
  • the measurement unit 223 may measure received power (e.g., RSRP), received quality (e.g., RSRQ, SINR, SNR), signal strength (e.g., RSSI), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc.
  • the measurement results may be output to the control unit 210.
  • the transmitting unit and receiving unit of the user terminal 20 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitting/receiving unit 220 and the transmitting/receiving antenna 230.
  • the transceiver 220 may receive a configuration indicating whether the serving cell can be a candidate cell for Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) inter-cell mobility.
  • the control unit 210 may control the switch of the serving cell based on the setting.
  • the setting may be a setting for each cell group indicating whether all the serving cells in the cell group can be candidate cells for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • the setting may be a setting indicating whether each serving cell in a cell group can be a candidate cell for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
  • the serving cell switch may be a switch of the serving cell that is the candidate cell to a special cell (SpCell) or a secondary cell (SCell).
  • SpCell special cell
  • SCell secondary cell
  • the transceiver unit 220 may receive a cell switch command for a special cell (SpCell) via Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling.
  • SpCell a special cell
  • L1/L2 Layer 1/Layer 2
  • the control unit 210 may make different assumptions about the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell.
  • the control unit 210 may assume that the activation or deactivation status of the candidate cell is not changed.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may receive an instruction to activate or deactivate the candidate cell.
  • the transceiver 220 may receive an index associated with a portion of the physical cell index (PCI) for the serving cell and candidate cells in the cell group.
  • PCI physical cell index
  • each functional block may be realized using one device that is physically or logically coupled, or may be realized using two or more devices that are physically or logically separated and directly or indirectly connected (for example, using wires, wirelessly, etc.).
  • the functional blocks may be realized by combining the one device or the multiple devices with software.
  • the functions include, but are not limited to, judgement, determination, judgment, calculation, computation, processing, derivation, investigation, search, confirmation, reception, transmission, output, access, resolution, selection, election, establishment, comparison, assumption, expectation, deeming, broadcasting, notifying, communicating, forwarding, configuring, reconfiguring, allocating, mapping, and assignment.
  • a functional block (component) that performs the transmission function may be called a transmitting unit, a transmitter, and the like. In either case, as mentioned above, there are no particular limitations on the method of realization.
  • a base station, a user terminal, etc. in one embodiment of the present disclosure may function as a computer that performs processing of the wireless communication method of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to one embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be physically configured as a computer device including a processor 1001, a memory 1002, a storage 1003, a communication device 1004, an input device 1005, an output device 1006, a bus 1007, etc.
  • the terms apparatus, circuit, device, section, unit, etc. may be interpreted as interchangeable.
  • the hardware configuration of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 may be configured to include one or more of the devices shown in the figures, or may be configured to exclude some of the devices.
  • processor 1001 may be implemented by one or more chips.
  • the functions of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 are realized, for example, by loading specific software (programs) onto hardware such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, causing the processor 1001 to perform calculations, control communications via the communication device 1004, and control at least one of the reading and writing of data in the memory 1002 and storage 1003.
  • the processor 1001 for example, runs an operating system to control the entire computer.
  • the processor 1001 may be configured as a central processing unit (CPU) including an interface with peripheral devices, a control device, an arithmetic unit, registers, etc.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • control unit 110 210
  • transmission/reception unit 120 220
  • etc. may be realized by the processor 1001.
  • the processor 1001 also reads out programs (program codes), software modules, data, etc. from at least one of the storage 1003 and the communication device 1004 into the memory 1002, and executes various processes according to these.
  • the programs used are those that cause a computer to execute at least some of the operations described in the above embodiments.
  • the control unit 110 (210) may be realized by a control program stored in the memory 1002 and running on the processor 1001, and similar implementations may be made for other functional blocks.
  • Memory 1002 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of, for example, Read Only Memory (ROM), Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically EPROM (EEPROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), and other suitable storage media. Memory 1002 may also be called a register, cache, main memory, etc. Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program codes), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • EPROM Erasable Programmable ROM
  • EEPROM Electrically EPROM
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • Memory 1002 may also be called a register, cache, main memory, etc.
  • Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program codes), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Storage 1003 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of a flexible disk, a floppy disk, a magneto-optical disk (e.g., a compact disk (Compact Disc ROM (CD-ROM)), a digital versatile disk, a Blu-ray disk), a removable disk, a hard disk drive, a smart card, a flash memory device (e.g., a card, a stick, a key drive), a magnetic stripe, a database, a server, or other suitable storage medium.
  • Storage 1003 may also be referred to as an auxiliary storage device.
  • the communication device 1004 is hardware (transmitting/receiving device) for communicating between computers via at least one of a wired network and a wireless network, and is also called, for example, a network device, a network controller, a network card, or a communication module.
  • the communication device 1004 may be configured to include a high-frequency switch, a duplexer, a filter, a frequency synthesizer, etc., to realize at least one of Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and Time Division Duplex (TDD).
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • the above-mentioned transmitting/receiving unit 120 (220), transmitting/receiving antenna 130 (230), etc. may be realized by the communication device 1004.
  • the transmitting/receiving unit 120 (220) may be implemented as a transmitting unit 120a (220a) and a receiving unit 120b (220b) that are physically or logically separated.
  • the input device 1005 is an input device (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, etc.) that accepts input from the outside.
  • the output device 1006 is an output device (e.g., a display, a speaker, a Light Emitting Diode (LED) lamp, etc.) that outputs to the outside.
  • the input device 1005 and the output device 1006 may be integrated into one structure (e.g., a touch panel).
  • each device such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002 is connected by a bus 1007 for communicating information.
  • the bus 1007 may be configured using a single bus, or may be configured using different buses between each device.
  • the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 may be configured to include hardware such as a microprocessor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a field programmable gate array (FPGA), and some or all of the functional blocks may be realized using the hardware.
  • the processor 1001 may be implemented using at least one of these pieces of hardware.
  • a channel, a symbol, and a signal may be read as mutually interchangeable.
  • a signal may also be a message.
  • a reference signal may be abbreviated as RS, and may be called a pilot, a pilot signal, or the like depending on the applied standard.
  • a component carrier may also be called a cell, a frequency carrier, a carrier frequency, or the like.
  • a radio frame may be composed of one or more periods (frames) in the time domain.
  • Each of the one or more periods (frames) constituting a radio frame may be called a subframe.
  • a subframe may be composed of one or more slots in the time domain.
  • a subframe may have a fixed time length (e.g., 1 ms) that is independent of numerology.
  • the numerology may be a communication parameter that is applied to at least one of the transmission and reception of a signal or channel.
  • the numerology may indicate, for example, at least one of the following: SubCarrier Spacing (SCS), bandwidth, symbol length, cyclic prefix length, Transmission Time Interval (TTI), number of symbols per TTI, radio frame configuration, a specific filtering process performed by the transceiver in the frequency domain, a specific windowing process performed by the transceiver in the time domain, etc.
  • SCS SubCarrier Spacing
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • radio frame configuration a specific filtering process performed by the transceiver in the frequency domain
  • a specific windowing process performed by the transceiver in the time domain etc.
  • a slot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain (such as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) symbols, etc.).
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • a slot may also be a time unit based on numerology.
  • a slot may include multiple minislots. Each minislot may consist of one or multiple symbols in the time domain. A minislot may also be called a subslot. A minislot may consist of fewer symbols than a slot.
  • a PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted in a time unit larger than a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type A.
  • a PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted using a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type B.
  • a radio frame, a subframe, a slot, a minislot, and a symbol all represent time units when transmitting a signal.
  • a different name may be used for a radio frame, a subframe, a slot, a minislot, and a symbol, respectively.
  • the time units such as a frame, a subframe, a slot, a minislot, and a symbol in this disclosure may be read as interchangeable.
  • one subframe may be called a TTI
  • multiple consecutive subframes may be called a TTI
  • one slot or one minislot may be called a TTI.
  • at least one of the subframe and the TTI may be a subframe (1 ms) in existing LTE, a period shorter than 1 ms (e.g., 1-13 symbols), or a period longer than 1 ms.
  • the unit representing the TTI may be called a slot, minislot, etc., instead of a subframe.
  • TTI refers to, for example, the smallest time unit for scheduling in wireless communication.
  • a base station schedules each user terminal by allocating radio resources (such as frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal) in TTI units.
  • radio resources such as frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal
  • the TTI may be a transmission time unit for a channel-coded data packet (transport block), a code block, a code word, etc., or may be a processing unit for scheduling, link adaptation, etc.
  • the time interval e.g., the number of symbols
  • the time interval in which a transport block, a code block, a code word, etc. is actually mapped may be shorter than the TTI.
  • one or more TTIs may be the minimum time unit of scheduling.
  • the number of slots (minislots) that constitute the minimum time unit of scheduling may be controlled.
  • a TTI having a time length of 1 ms may be called a normal TTI (TTI in 3GPP Rel. 8-12), normal TTI, long TTI, normal subframe, normal subframe, long subframe, slot, etc.
  • a TTI shorter than a normal TTI may be called a shortened TTI, short TTI, partial or fractional TTI, shortened subframe, short subframe, minislot, subslot, slot, etc.
  • a long TTI (e.g., a normal TTI, a subframe, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a time length of more than 1 ms
  • a short TTI e.g., a shortened TTI, etc.
  • TTI length shorter than the TTI length of a long TTI and equal to or greater than 1 ms.
  • a resource block is a resource allocation unit in the time domain and frequency domain, and may include one or more consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • the number of subcarriers included in an RB may be the same regardless of numerology, and may be, for example, 12.
  • the number of subcarriers included in an RB may be determined based on numerology.
  • an RB may include one or more symbols in the time domain and may be one slot, one minislot, one subframe, or one TTI in length.
  • One TTI, one subframe, etc. may each be composed of one or more resource blocks.
  • one or more RBs may be referred to as a physical resource block (Physical RB (PRB)), a sub-carrier group (Sub-Carrier Group (SCG)), a resource element group (Resource Element Group (REG)), a PRB pair, an RB pair, etc.
  • PRB Physical RB
  • SCG sub-carrier Group
  • REG resource element group
  • PRB pair an RB pair, etc.
  • a resource block may be composed of one or more resource elements (REs).
  • REs resource elements
  • one RE may be a radio resource area of one subcarrier and one symbol.
  • a Bandwidth Part which may also be referred to as a partial bandwidth, may represent a subset of contiguous common resource blocks (RBs) for a given numerology on a given carrier, where the common RBs may be identified by an index of the RB relative to a common reference point of the carrier.
  • PRBs may be defined in a BWP and numbered within the BWP.
  • the BWP may include a UL BWP (BWP for UL) and a DL BWP (BWP for DL).
  • BWP UL BWP
  • BWP for DL DL BWP
  • One or more BWPs may be configured for a UE within one carrier.
  • At least one of the configured BWPs may be active, and the UE may not expect to transmit or receive a given signal/channel outside the active BWP.
  • BWP bitmap
  • radio frames, subframes, slots, minislots, and symbols are merely examples.
  • the number of subframes included in a radio frame, the number of slots per subframe or radio frame, the number of minislots included in a slot, the number of symbols and RBs included in a slot or minislot, the number of subcarriers included in an RB, as well as the number of symbols in a TTI, the symbol length, and the cyclic prefix (CP) length can be changed in various ways.
  • the information, parameters, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using absolute values, may be represented using relative values from a predetermined value, or may be represented using other corresponding information.
  • a radio resource may be indicated by a predetermined index.
  • the names used for parameters and the like in this disclosure are not limiting in any respect. Furthermore, the formulas and the like using these parameters may differ from those explicitly disclosed in this disclosure.
  • the various channels (PUCCH, PDCCH, etc.) and information elements may be identified by any suitable names, and therefore the various names assigned to these various channels and information elements are not limiting in any respect.
  • the information, signals, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies.
  • the data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, chips, etc. that may be referred to throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or magnetic particles, optical fields or photons, or any combination thereof.
  • Information, signals, etc. may be output from a higher layer to a lower layer and/or from a lower layer to a higher layer. Information, signals, etc. may be input/output via multiple network nodes.
  • Input/output information, signals, etc. may be stored in a specific location (e.g., memory) or may be managed using a management table. Input/output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to. Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted. Input information, signals, etc. may be transmitted to another device.
  • a specific location e.g., memory
  • Input/output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to.
  • Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted.
  • Input information, signals, etc. may be transmitted to another device.
  • the notification of information is not limited to the aspects/embodiments described in this disclosure, and may be performed using other methods.
  • the notification of information in this disclosure may be performed by physical layer signaling (e.g., Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI)), higher layer signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, broadcast information (Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block (SIB)), etc.), Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling), other signals, or a combination of these.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • UCI Uplink Control Information
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • SIB System Information Block
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • the physical layer signaling may be called Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) control information (L1/L2 control signal), L1 control information (L1 control signal), etc.
  • the RRC signaling may be called an RRC message, for example, an RRC Connection Setup message, an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, etc.
  • the MAC signaling may be notified, for example, using a MAC Control Element (CE).
  • CE MAC Control Element
  • notification of specified information is not limited to explicit notification, but may be implicit (e.g., by not notifying the specified information or by notifying other information).
  • the determination may be based on a value represented by a single bit (0 or 1), a Boolean value represented by true or false, or a comparison of numerical values (e.g., with a predetermined value).
  • Software shall be construed broadly to mean instructions, instruction sets, code, code segments, program code, programs, subprograms, software modules, applications, software applications, software packages, routines, subroutines, objects, executable files, threads of execution, procedures, functions, etc., whether referred to as software, firmware, middleware, microcode, hardware description language, or otherwise.
  • Software, instructions, information, etc. may also be transmitted and received via a transmission medium.
  • a transmission medium For example, if the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using at least one of wired technologies (such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)), and/or wireless technologies (such as infrared, microwave, etc.), then at least one of these wired and wireless technologies is included within the definition of a transmission medium.
  • wired technologies such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
  • wireless technologies such as infrared, microwave, etc.
  • Network may refer to the devices included in the network (e.g., base stations).
  • precoding "precoder,” “weight (precoding weight),” “Quasi-Co-Location (QCL),” “Transmission Configuration Indication state (TCI state),” "spatial relation,” “spatial domain filter,” “transmit power,” “phase rotation,” “antenna port,” “antenna port group,” “layer,” “number of layers,” “rank,” “resource,” “resource set,” “resource group,” “beam,” “beam width,” “beam angle,” “antenna,” “antenna element,” and “panel” may be used interchangeably.
  • Base Station may also be referred to by terms such as macrocell, small cell, femtocell, picocell, etc.
  • a base station can accommodate one or more (e.g., three) cells.
  • a base station accommodates multiple cells, the entire coverage area of the base station can be divided into multiple smaller areas, and each smaller area can also provide communication services by a base station subsystem (e.g., a small base station for indoor use (Remote Radio Head (RRH))).
  • RRH Remote Radio Head
  • the term "cell” or “sector” refers to a part or the entire coverage area of at least one of the base station and base station subsystems that provide communication services in this coverage.
  • a base station transmitting information to a terminal may be interpreted as the base station instructing the terminal to control/operate based on the information.
  • MS Mobile Station
  • UE User Equipment
  • a mobile station may also be referred to as a subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client, or some other suitable terminology.
  • At least one of the base station and the mobile station may be called a transmitting device, a receiving device, a wireless communication device, etc.
  • at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be a device mounted on a moving object, the moving object itself, etc.
  • the moving body in question refers to an object that can move, and the moving speed is arbitrary, and of course includes the case where the moving body is stationary.
  • the moving body in question includes, but is not limited to, vehicles, transport vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, bicycles, connected cars, excavators, bulldozers, wheel loaders, dump trucks, forklifts, trains, buses, handcarts, rickshaws, ships and other watercraft, airplanes, rockets, artificial satellites, drones, multicopters, quadcopters, balloons, and objects mounted on these.
  • the moving body in question may also be a moving body that moves autonomously based on an operating command.
  • the moving object may be a vehicle (e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.), an unmanned moving object (e.g., a drone, an autonomous vehicle, etc.), or a robot (manned or unmanned).
  • a vehicle e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.
  • an unmanned moving object e.g., a drone, an autonomous vehicle, etc.
  • a robot manned or unmanned
  • at least one of the base station and the mobile station may also include devices that do not necessarily move during communication operations.
  • at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be an Internet of Things (IoT) device such as a sensor.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment.
  • the vehicle 40 includes a drive unit 41, a steering unit 42, an accelerator pedal 43, a brake pedal 44, a shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, an axle 48, an electronic control unit 49, various sensors (including a current sensor 50, a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58), an information service unit 59, and a communication module 60.
  • various sensors including a current sensor 50, a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58
  • an information service unit 59 including a communication module 60.
  • the drive unit 41 is composed of at least one of an engine, a motor, and a hybrid of an engine and a motor, for example.
  • the steering unit 42 includes at least a steering wheel (also called a handlebar), and is configured to steer at least one of the front wheels 46 and the rear wheels 47 based on the operation of the steering wheel operated by the user.
  • the electronic control unit 49 is composed of a microprocessor 61, memory (ROM, RAM) 62, and a communication port (e.g., an Input/Output (IO) port) 63. Signals are input to the electronic control unit 49 from various sensors 50-58 provided in the vehicle.
  • the electronic control unit 49 may also be called an Electronic Control Unit (ECU).
  • ECU Electronic Control Unit
  • Signals from the various sensors 50-58 include a current signal from a current sensor 50 that senses the motor current, a rotation speed signal of the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 acquired by a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure signal of the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 acquired by an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed signal acquired by a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration signal acquired by an acceleration sensor 54, a depression amount signal of the accelerator pedal 43 acquired by an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a depression amount signal of the brake pedal 44 acquired by a brake pedal sensor 56, an operation signal of the shift lever 45 acquired by a shift lever sensor 57, and a detection signal for detecting obstacles, vehicles, pedestrians, etc. acquired by an object detection sensor 58.
  • the information service unit 59 is composed of various devices, such as a car navigation system, audio system, speakers, displays, televisions, and radios, for providing (outputting) various information such as driving information, traffic information, and entertainment information, and one or more ECUs that control these devices.
  • the information service unit 59 uses information acquired from external devices via the communication module 60, etc., to provide various information/services (e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services) to the occupants of the vehicle 40.
  • various information/services e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services
  • the information service unit 59 may include input devices (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, a touch panel, etc.) that accept input from the outside, and may also include output devices (e.g., a display, a speaker, an LED lamp, a touch panel, etc.) that perform output to the outside.
  • input devices e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, a touch panel, etc.
  • output devices e.g., a display, a speaker, an LED lamp, a touch panel, etc.
  • the driving assistance system unit 64 is composed of various devices that provide functions for preventing accidents and reducing the driver's driving load, such as a millimeter wave radar, a Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR), a camera, a positioning locator (e.g., a Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)), map information (e.g., a High Definition (HD) map, an Autonomous Vehicle (AV) map, etc.), a gyro system (e.g., an Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU), an Inertial Navigation System (INS), etc.), an Artificial Intelligence (AI) chip, and an AI processor, and one or more ECUs that control these devices.
  • the driving assistance system unit 64 also transmits and receives various information via the communication module 60 to realize a driving assistance function or an autonomous driving function.
  • the communication module 60 can communicate with the microprocessor 61 and components of the vehicle 40 via the communication port 63.
  • the communication module 60 transmits and receives data (information) via the communication port 63 between the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, the microprocessor 61 and memory (ROM, RAM) 62 in the electronic control unit 49, and the various sensors 50-58 that are provided on the vehicle 40.
  • the communication module 60 is a communication device that can be controlled by the microprocessor 61 of the electronic control unit 49 and can communicate with an external device. For example, it transmits and receives various information to and from the external device via wireless communication.
  • the communication module 60 may be located either inside or outside the electronic control unit 49.
  • the external device may be, for example, the above-mentioned base station 10 or user terminal 20.
  • the communication module 60 may also be, for example, at least one of the above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 (it may function as at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20).
  • the communication module 60 may transmit at least one of the signals from the various sensors 50-58 described above input to the electronic control unit 49, information obtained based on the signals, and information based on input from the outside (user) obtained via the information service unit 59 to an external device via wireless communication.
  • the electronic control unit 49, the various sensors 50-58, the information service unit 59, etc. may be referred to as input units that accept input.
  • the PUSCH transmitted by the communication module 60 may include information based on the above input.
  • the communication module 60 receives various information (traffic information, signal information, vehicle distance information, etc.) transmitted from an external device and displays it on an information service unit 59 provided in the vehicle.
  • the information service unit 59 may also be called an output unit that outputs information (for example, outputs information to a device such as a display or speaker based on the PDSCH (or data/information decoded from the PDSCH) received by the communication module 60).
  • the communication module 60 also stores various information received from external devices in memory 62 that can be used by the microprocessor 61. Based on the information stored in memory 62, the microprocessor 61 may control the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, various sensors 50-58, and the like provided on the vehicle 40.
  • the base station in the present disclosure may be read as a user terminal.
  • each aspect/embodiment of the present disclosure may be applied to a configuration in which communication between a base station and a user terminal is replaced with communication between multiple user terminals (which may be called, for example, Device-to-Device (D2D), Vehicle-to-Everything (V2X), etc.).
  • the user terminal 20 may be configured to have the functions of the base station 10 described above.
  • terms such as "uplink” and "downlink” may be read as terms corresponding to terminal-to-terminal communication (for example, "sidelink").
  • the uplink channel, downlink channel, etc. may be read as the sidelink channel.
  • the user terminal in this disclosure may be interpreted as a base station.
  • the base station 10 may be configured to have the functions of the user terminal 20 described above.
  • operations that are described as being performed by a base station may in some cases be performed by its upper node.
  • a network that includes one or more network nodes having base stations, it is clear that various operations performed for communication with terminals may be performed by the base station, one or more network nodes other than the base station (such as, but not limited to, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving-Gateway (S-GW)), or a combination of these.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving-Gateway
  • each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be used alone, in combination, or switched between depending on the implementation.
  • the processing procedures, sequences, flow charts, etc. of each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be rearranged as long as there is no inconsistency.
  • the methods described in this disclosure present elements of various steps using an exemplary order, and are not limited to the particular order presented.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A LTE-Advanced
  • LTE-B LTE-Beyond
  • SUPER 3G IMT-Advanced
  • 4th generation mobile communication system 4th generation mobile communication system
  • 5G 5th generation mobile communication system
  • 6G 6th generation mobile communication system
  • xG x is, for example, an integer or decimal
  • Future Radio Access FX
  • GSM Global System for Mobile communications
  • CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access
  • UMB Ultra Mobile Broadband
  • IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi
  • IEEE 802.16 WiMAX (registered trademark)
  • IEEE 802.20 Ultra-WideBand (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), and other appropriate wireless communication methods, as well as next-generation systems that are expanded, modified,
  • the phrase “based on” does not mean “based only on,” unless expressly stated otherwise. In other words, the phrase “based on” means both “based only on” and “based at least on.”
  • any reference to elements using designations such as “first,” “second,” etc., used in this disclosure does not generally limit the quantity or order of those elements. These designations may be used in this disclosure as a convenient method of distinguishing between two or more elements. Thus, a reference to a first and second element does not imply that only two elements may be employed or that the first element must precede the second element in some way.
  • determining may encompass a wide variety of actions. For example, “determining” may be considered to be judging, calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up, search, inquiry (e.g., looking in a table, database, or other data structure), ascertaining, etc.
  • Determining may also be considered to mean “determining” receiving (e.g., receiving information), transmitting (e.g., sending information), input, output, accessing (e.g., accessing data in a memory), etc.
  • “Judgment” may also be considered to mean “deciding” to resolve, select, choose, establish, compare, etc.
  • judgment may also be considered to mean “deciding” to take some kind of action.
  • the "maximum transmit power" referred to in this disclosure may mean the maximum value of transmit power, may mean the nominal UE maximum transmit power, or may mean the rated UE maximum transmit power.
  • connection and “coupled,” or any variation thereof, refer to any direct or indirect connection or coupling between two or more elements, and may include the presence of one or more intermediate elements between two elements that are “connected” or “coupled” to each other.
  • the coupling or connection between the elements may be physical, logical, or a combination thereof. For example, "connected” may be read as "accessed.”
  • a and B are different may mean “A and B are different from each other.”
  • the term may also mean “A and B are each different from C.”
  • Terms such as “separate” and “combined” may also be interpreted in the same way as “different.”

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A terminal according to one aspect of the present disclosure comprises: a receiving unit that receives a cell switch command of a special cell (SpCell) by layer 1/layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling; and a control unit that makes different assumptions about the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell on the basis of the type of the candidate cell. According to one aspect of the present disclosure, settings/processing at the time of cell switching can be appropriately performed.

Description

端末、無線通信方法及び基地局Terminal, wireless communication method and base station
 本開示は、次世代移動通信システムにおける端末、無線通信方法及び基地局に関する。 This disclosure relates to terminals, wireless communication methods, and base stations in next-generation mobile communication systems.
 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System(UMTS)ネットワークにおいて、更なる高速データレート、低遅延などを目的としてLong Term Evolution(LTE)が仕様化された(非特許文献1)。また、LTE(Third Generation Partnership Project(3GPP(登録商標)) Release(Rel.)8、9)の更なる大容量、高度化などを目的として、LTE-Advanced(3GPP Rel.10-14)が仕様化された。 Long Term Evolution (LTE) was specified for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) networks with the aim of achieving higher data rates and lower latency (Non-Patent Document 1). In addition, LTE-Advanced (3GPP Rel. 10-14) was specified for the purpose of achieving higher capacity and greater sophistication over LTE (Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP (registered trademark)) Release (Rel.) 8, 9).
 LTEの後継システム(例えば、5th generation mobile communication system(5G)、5G+(plus)、6th generation mobile communication system(6G)、New Radio(NR)、3GPP Rel.15以降などともいう)も検討されている。 Successor systems to LTE (e.g., 5th generation mobile communication system (5G), 5G+ (plus), 6th generation mobile communication system (6G), New Radio (NR), 3GPP Rel. 15 and later, etc.) are also under consideration.
 無線通信システムにおいて、1つ又は複数のセル/送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))(マルチTRP(Multi-TRP(MTRP)))が、端末(ユーザ端末(user terminal)、User Equipment(UE))に対して下りリンク(DL)送信を行うことが検討されている。 In a wireless communication system, it is being considered that one or more cells/transmission/reception points (Transmission/Reception Points (TRPs)) (Multi-TRPs (MTRPs)) will perform downlink (DL) transmissions to a terminal (user terminal, User Equipment (UE)).
 ところで、マルチTRPを適用した場合に、layer1/layer2 inter-cell mobility(L1/L2セル間モビリティ)により、セルスイッチが行われることが検討されている。例えば、現在のSCell/PCellが、候補セルとなることも考えられる。その場合の、設定/制御について明確になっていない。これによりセルスイッチ後の処理が適切に行われず、例えば、通信スループットが低下するなどの問題が生じるおそれがある。 Incidentally, when multi-TRP is applied, it is being considered that cell switching will be performed using layer 1/layer 2 inter-cell mobility. For example, it is possible that the current SCell/PCell will become a candidate cell. In that case, the settings/control are not clear. This may result in processing after the cell switch not being performed properly, which could lead to problems such as a decrease in communication throughput.
 そこで、本開示は、セルスイッチの際の設定/処理を適切に行うことができる端末、無線通信方法及び基地局を提供することを目的の1つとする。 Therefore, one of the objectives of this disclosure is to provide a terminal, a wireless communication method, and a base station that can appropriately perform settings/processing during a cell switch.
 本開示の一態様に係る端末は、レイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)シグナリングによりスペシャルセル(SpCell)のセルスイッチコマンドを受信する受信部と、候補セルのタイプに基づいて、当該候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスについて異なる想定を行う制御部と、を有することを特徴とする。 A terminal according to one embodiment of the present disclosure is characterized by having a receiver that receives a cell switch command for a special cell (SpCell) via Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling, and a controller that makes different assumptions about the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell.
 本開示の一態様によれば、セルスイッチの際の設定/処理を適切に行うことができる。 According to one aspect of the present disclosure, settings/processing can be performed appropriately when switching the cell.
図1A~図1Dは、マルチTRPの構成例を示す図である。1A to 1D are diagrams showing examples of the configuration of a multi-TRP. 図2Aは、Rel.17におけるUEの移動の例を示す図である。図2Bは、Rel.18におけるUEの移動の例を示す図である。2A is a diagram showing an example of UE movement in Rel. 17. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of UE movement in Rel. 18. 図3は、サービングセルと候補セルの関連づけの例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of association between a serving cell and a candidate cell. 図4Aは、オプション1のServingCellConfigの第1の例を示す図である。図4Bは、オプション1のServingCellConfigの第2の例を示す図である。4A is a diagram showing a first example of a ServingCellConfig of option 1. FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a second example of a ServingCellConfig of option 1. 図5は、オプション2の第1の例を示す図である。FIG. 5 shows a first example of option 2. 図6Aは、オプション2の第2の例を示す図である。図6Bは、オプション2の第3の例を示す図である。6A is a diagram showing a second example of option 2. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a third example of option 2. 図7は、サービングセルスイッチ例1を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a serving cell switch example 1. 図8は、サービングセルスイッチ例2を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a serving cell switch example 2. 図9は、サービングセルスイッチ例3を示す図である。FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a serving cell switch example 3. 図10は、態様1.1のサービングセルの設定例を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a serving cell configuration according to aspect 1.1. 図11は、態様1.2のサービングセルの設定例を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a serving cell configuration according to aspect 1.2. 図12は、実施形態2.1のセルタイプの設定例を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of setting a cell type in embodiment 2.1. 図13は、一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの概略構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment. 図14は、一実施形態に係る基地局の構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment. 図15は、一実施形態に係るユーザ端末の構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment. 図16は、一実施形態に係る基地局及びユーザ端末のハードウェア構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to an embodiment. 図17は、一実施形態に係る車両の一例を示す図である。FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment.
(マルチTRP)
 NRでは、1つ又は複数の送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))(マルチTRP)が、1つ又は複数のパネル(マルチパネル)を用いて、UEに対してDL送信を行うことが検討されている。また、UEが、1つ又は複数のTRPに対してUL送信を行うことが検討されている。
(Multi-TRP)
In NR, one or more transmission/reception points (TRPs) (multi-TRPs) are considered to perform DL transmission to a UE using one or more panels (multi-panels). It is also considered that a UE performs UL transmission to one or more TRPs.
 なお、複数のTRPは、同じセル識別子(セルIdentifier(ID))に対応してもよいし、異なるセルIDに対応してもよい。当該セルIDは、物理セルID(PCI)でもよいし、仮想セルIDでもよい。 Note that multiple TRPs may correspond to the same cell identifier (cell identifier (ID)) or different cell IDs. The cell ID may be a physical cell ID (PCI) or a virtual cell ID.
 図1A-1Dは、マルチTRPシナリオの一例を示す図である。これらの例において、各TRPは4つの異なるビームを送信可能であると想定するが、これに限られない。 Figures 1A-1D show examples of multi-TRP scenarios. In these examples, we assume, but are not limited to, that each TRP is capable of transmitting four different beams.
 図1Aは、マルチTRPのうち1つのTRP(本例ではTRP1)のみがUEに対して送信を行うケース(シングルモード、シングルTRPなどと呼ばれてもよい)の一例を示す。この場合、TRP1は、UEに制御信号(PDCCH)及びデータ信号(PDSCH)の両方を送信する。 Figure 1A shows an example of a case where only one TRP (TRP1 in this example) of the multi-TRP transmits to the UE (which may be called single mode, single TRP, etc.). In this case, TRP1 transmits both a control signal (PDCCH) and a data signal (PDSCH) to the UE.
 図1Bは、マルチTRPのうち1つのTRP(本例ではTRP1)のみがUEに対して制御信号を送信し、当該マルチTRPがデータ信号を送信するケース(シングルマスタモードと呼ばれてもよい)の一例を示す。UEは、1つの下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))に基づいて、当該マルチTRPから送信される各PDSCHを受信する。 Figure 1B shows an example of a case where only one TRP (TRP1 in this example) of the multi-TRP transmits a control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (which may be called a single master mode). The UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on one downlink control information (Downlink Control Information (DCI)).
 図1Cは、マルチTRPのそれぞれがUEに対して制御信号の一部を送信し、当該マルチTRPがデータ信号を送信するケース(マスタスレーブモードと呼ばれてもよい)の一例を示す。TRP1では制御信号(DCI)のパート1が送信され、TRP2では制御信号(DCI)のパート2が送信されてもよい。制御信号のパート2はパート1に依存してもよい。UEは、これらのDCIのパートに基づいて、当該マルチTRPから送信される各PDSCHを受信する。 Figure 1C shows an example of a case where each of the multi-TRPs transmits a part of a control signal to the UE and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (which may be called a master-slave mode). TRP1 may transmit part 1 of the control signal (DCI) and TRP2 may transmit part 2 of the control signal (DCI). Part 2 of the control signal may depend on part 1. The UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on these parts of DCI.
 図1Dは、マルチTRPのそれぞれがUEに対して別々の制御信号を送信し、当該マルチTRPがデータ信号を送信するケース(マルチマスタモードと呼ばれてもよい)の一例を示す。TRP1では第1の制御信号(DCI)が送信され、TRP2では第2の制御信号(DCI)が送信されてもよい。UEは、これらのDCIに基づいて、当該マルチTRPから送信される各PDSCHを受信する。 Figure 1D shows an example of a case where each of the multi-TRPs transmits a separate control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (which may be called a multi-master mode). A first control signal (DCI) may be transmitted from TRP1, and a second control signal (DCI) may be transmitted from TRP2. The UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on these DCIs.
 図1BのようなマルチTRPからの複数のPDSCH(マルチPDSCH(multiple PDSCH)と呼ばれてもよい)を、1つのDCIを用いてスケジュールする場合、当該DCIは、シングルDCI(S-DCI、シングルPDCCH)と呼ばれてもよい。また、図1DのようなマルチTRPからの複数のPDSCHを、複数のDCIを用いてそれぞれスケジュールする場合、これらの複数のDCIは、マルチDCI(M-DCI、マルチPDCCH(multiple PDCCH))と呼ばれてもよい。 When multiple PDSCHs from a multi-TRP such as that shown in FIG. 1B (which may also be called multiple PDSCHs) are scheduled using one DCI, the DCI may be called a single DCI (S-DCI, single PDCCH). Also, when multiple PDSCHs from a multi-TRP such as that shown in FIG. 1D are scheduled using multiple DCIs, these multiple DCIs may be called multiple DCIs (M-DCI, multiple PDCCHs).
 マルチTRPの各TRPからは、それぞれ異なるトランスポートブロック(Transport Block(TB))/コードワード(Code Word(CW))/異なるレイヤが送信されてもよい。あるいは、マルチTRPの各TRPからは、同一のTB/CW/レイヤが送信されてもよい。 Each TRP in a multi-TRP may transmit a different Transport Block (TB)/Code Word (CW)/different layer. Alternatively, each TRP in a multi-TRP may transmit the same TB/CW/layer.
 マルチTRP送信の一形態として、ノンコヒーレントジョイント送信(Non-Coherent Joint Transmission(NCJT))が検討されている。NCJTにおいて、例えば、TRP1は、第1のコードワードを変調マッピングし、レイヤマッピングして第1の数のレイヤ(例えば2レイヤ)を第1のプリコーディングを用いて第1のPDSCHを送信する。また、TRP2は、第2のコードワードを変調マッピングし、レイヤマッピングして第2の数のレイヤ(例えば2レイヤ)を第2のプリコーディングを用いて第2のPDSCHを送信する。 Non-Coherent Joint Transmission (NCJT) is being considered as one form of multi-TRP transmission. In NCJT, for example, TRP1 modulates and maps a first codeword, and transmits a first PDSCH using a first number of layers (e.g., two layers) and a first precoding by layer mapping. TRP2 modulates and maps a second codeword, and transmits a second PDSCH using a second number of layers (e.g., two layers) and a second precoding by layer mapping.
 なお、NCJTされる複数のPDSCH(マルチPDSCH)は、時間及び周波数ドメインの少なくとも一方に関して部分的に又は完全に重複すると定義されてもよい。つまり、第1のTRPからの第1のPDSCHと、第2のTRPからの第2のPDSCHと、は時間及び周波数リソースの少なくとも一方が重複してもよい。 Note that multiple PDSCHs (multi-PDSCHs) that are NCJTed may be defined as partially or completely overlapping with respect to at least one of the time and frequency domains. In other words, the first PDSCH from the first TRP and the second PDSCH from the second TRP may overlap with each other in at least one of the time and frequency resources.
 これらの第1のPDSCH及び第2のPDSCHは、疑似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))関係にない(not quasi-co-located)と想定されてもよい。マルチPDSCHの受信は、あるQCLタイプ(例えば、QCLタイプD)でないPDSCHの同時受信で読み替えられてもよい。 The first PDSCH and the second PDSCH may be assumed to be not quasi-co-located (QCL). Reception of multiple PDSCHs may be interpreted as simultaneous reception of PDSCHs that are not of a certain QCL type (e.g., QCL type D).
 マルチTRPに対するURLLCにおいて、マルチTRPにまたがるPDSCH(トランスポートブロック(TB)又はコードワード(CW))繰り返し(repetition)がサポートされることが検討されている。周波数ドメイン又はレイヤ(空間)ドメイン又は時間ドメイン上でマルチTRPにまたがる繰り返し方式(URLLCスキーム、例えば、スキーム1、2a、2b、3、4)がサポートされることが検討されている。スキーム1において、マルチTRPからのマルチPDSCHは、空間分割多重(space division multiplexing(SDM))される。スキーム2a、2bにおいて、マルチTRPからのPDSCHは、周波数分割多重(frequency division multiplexing(FDM))される。スキーム2aにおいては、マルチTRPに対して冗長バージョン(redundancy version(RV))は同じである。スキーム2bにおいては、マルチTRPに対してRVは同じであってもよいし、異なってもよい。スキーム3、4において、マルチTRPからのマルチPDSCHは、時間分割多重(time division multiplexing(TDM))される。スキーム3において、マルチTRPからのマルチPDSCHは、1つのスロット内で送信される。スキーム4において、マルチTRPからのマルチPDSCHは、異なるスロット内で送信される。 In URLLC for multi-TRP, it is considered that PDSCH (transport block (TB) or codeword (CW)) repetition across multi-TRP is supported. It is considered that repetition methods (URLLC schemes, e.g., schemes 1, 2a, 2b, 3, 4) across multi-TRP in the frequency domain, layer (spatial) domain, or time domain are supported. In scheme 1, multi-PDSCH from multi-TRP is space division multiplexed (SDM). In schemes 2a and 2b, PDSCH from multi-TRP is frequency division multiplexed (FDM). In scheme 2a, the redundancy version (RV) is the same for multi-TRP. In scheme 2b, the RV may be the same or different for multi-TRP. In schemes 3 and 4, multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are time division multiplexed (TDM). In scheme 3, multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are transmitted in one slot. In scheme 4, multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are transmitted in different slots.
 このようなマルチTRPシナリオによれば、品質の良いチャネルを用いたより柔軟な送信制御が可能である。 Such a multi-TRP scenario allows for more flexible transmission control using channels with better quality.
 マルチTRP/パネルを用いるNCJTは、高ランクを用いる可能性がある。複数TRPの間の理想的(ideal)及び非理想的(non-ideal)のバックホール(backhaul)をサポートするために、シングルDCI(シングルPDCCH、例えば、図1B)及びマルチDCI(マルチPDCCH、例えば、図1D)の両方がサポートされてもよい。シングルDCI及びマルチDCIの両方に対し、TRPの最大数が2であってもよい。 NCJT using multiple TRPs/panels may use high rank. To support ideal and non-ideal backhaul between multiple TRPs, both single DCI (single PDCCH, e.g., FIG. 1B) and multiple DCI (multiple PDCCH, e.g., FIG. 1D) may be supported. For both single DCI and multiple DCI, the maximum number of TRPs may be 2.
 シングルPDCCH設計(主に理想バックホール用)に対し、TCIの拡張が検討されている。DCI内の各TCIコードポイントは1又は2のTCI状態に対応してもよい。TCIフィールドサイズはRel.15のものと同じであってもよい。 For single PDCCH design (mainly for ideal backhaul), TCI extension is being considered. Each TCI code point in the DCI may correspond to TCI state 1 or 2. The TCI field size may be the same as that of Rel. 15.
(L1/L2セル間モビリティ)
 以上のように、UEが、1つ又は複数のセル/TRPに対してUL送信を行うことが検討されている。この場合の手順として、以下のシナリオ1又はシナリオ2が考えられる。なお、本開示において、サービングセルは、サービングセル内のTRPに読み替えられてもよい。layer1/layer2(L1/L2)、DCI/Medium Access Control Control Element(MAC CE)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、現在のサービングセルの物理セルID(Physical Cell Identity(PCI))とは異なるPCIを、単に「異なるPCI」と記載することがある。非サービングセル、異なるPCIを有するセル、追加セルは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。
(L1/L2 Inter-Cell Mobility)
As described above, it is considered that the UE performs UL transmission to one or more cells/TRPs. As a procedure in this case, the following scenario 1 or scenario 2 is considered. In this disclosure, the serving cell may be read as a TRP in the serving cell. Layer 1/layer 2 (L1/L2) and DCI/Medium Access Control Control Element (MAC CE) may be read as each other. In this disclosure, a PCI different from the physical cell identity (PCI) of the current serving cell may be simply described as a "different PCI". A non-serving cell, a cell having a different PCI, and an additional cell may be read as each other.
<シナリオ1>
 シナリオ1は、例えば、マルチTRPのセル間モビリティに対応するが、マルチTRPのセル間モビリティに対応しないシナリオであっても構わない。
<Scenario 1>
Scenario 1 corresponds to, for example, multi-TRP inter-cell mobility, but it may also be a scenario that does not correspond to multi-TRP inter-cell mobility.
(1)UEは、サービングセルから、当該サービングセルとは異なるPCIに対応するTRPのビーム測定用のSSBの設定、及び異なるPCIのリソースを含む、データ送受信に無線リソースを使用するために必要な設定を受信する。
(2)UEは、異なるPCIに対応するTRPのビーム測定を実行し、ビーム測定結果をサービングセルに報告する。
(3)上記の報告に基づいて、異なるPCIに対応するTRPに関連付けられた送信設定指示(Transmission Configuration Indication(TCI))状態が、サービングセルからのL1/L2シグナリングによって、アクティブ化される。
(4)UEは、異なるPCIに対応するTRP上のUE固有(dedicated)チャネルを使用して送受信する。
(5)UEは、マルチTRPの場合も含めて、常にサービングセルをカバーしている必要がある。UEは、従来システムと同様に、サービングセルからの共通チャネル(ブロードキャスト制御チャネル(BCCH:Broadcast Control Channel)、ページングチャネル(PCH:Paging Channel))などを使用する必要がある。
(1) The UE receives from the serving cell the configuration necessary to use radio resources for data transmission and reception, including an SSB configuration for beam measurement of a TRP corresponding to a PCI different from that of the serving cell, and resources of the different PCI.
(2) The UE performs beam measurements of TRPs corresponding to different PCIs and reports the beam measurement results to the serving cell.
(3) Based on the above report, the Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states associated with the TRPs corresponding to different PCIs are activated by L1/L2 signaling from the serving cell.
(4) The UE transmits and receives using UE-specific (dedicated) channels on TRPs corresponding to different PCIs.
(5) The UE must always cover the serving cell, including in the case of multi-TRP. The UE must use common channels (Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH), Paging Channel (PCH)) from the serving cell, as in the conventional system.
 シナリオ1では、UEが、追加セル/TRP(追加セルのPCIに対応するTRP)と信号を送受信するときに、サービングセル(UEにおけるサービングセルの想定)は変更されない。UEは、サービングセルから、非サービングセルのPCIに関連する上位レイヤパラメータを設定される。シナリオ1は、例えば、Rel.17において適用されてもよい。 In scenario 1, when the UE transmits and receives signals to and from an additional cell/TRP (a TRP corresponding to the PCI of the additional cell), the serving cell (the serving cell assumption in the UE) is not changed. The UE is configured with higher layer parameters related to the PCI of the non-serving cell from the serving cell. Scenario 1 may be applied, for example, in Rel. 17.
 図2Aは、Rel.17におけるUEの移動の例を示す図である。UEが、PCI#1のセル(サービングセル)からPCI#3のセル(追加セル)(サービングセルに重複する)に移動したとする。この場合、Rel.17では、サービングセルはL1/L2により切り替えられない。追加セルは、サービングセルのPCIとは異なる追加PCIを持つセルである。UEは、追加セルからUE固有(dedicated)チャネルを受信/送信することができる。UEは、UE共通チャネル(例えば、システム情報/ページング/ショートメッセージ)を受信するために、サービングセルのカバレッジ内にいる必要がある。 Figure 2A shows an example of UE movement in Rel. 17. Assume that the UE moves from a cell with PCI #1 (serving cell) to a cell with PCI #3 (additional cell) (which overlaps with the serving cell). In this case, in Rel. 17, the serving cell is not switched by L1/L2. The additional cell is a cell with an additional PCI that is different from the PCI of the serving cell. The UE can receive/transmit UE-specific (dedicated) channels from the additional cell. The UE needs to be within the coverage of the serving cell to receive UE common channels (e.g., system information/paging/short messages).
<シナリオ2>
 シナリオ2では、L1/L2セル間モビリティを適用する。L1/L2セル間モビリティでは、RRC再設定せずに、ビーム制御などの機能を用いてサービングセル変更が可能である。言い換えると、ハンドオーバーせずに、追加セルとの送受信が可能である。ハンドオーバーのためにはRRC再接続が必要になるなど、データ通信不可期間が生じるので、ハンドオーバー不要なL1/L2セル間モビリティを適用することにより、サービングセル変更の際にもデータ通信を継続することができる。シナリオ2では、例えば、以下の手順が行われる。
<Scenario 2>
In scenario 2, L1/L2 inter-cell mobility is applied. In L1/L2 inter-cell mobility, the serving cell can be changed using a function such as beam control without RRC reconfiguration. In other words, transmission and reception with an additional cell is possible without handover. Since handover requires RRC reconnection and creates a period during which data communication is not possible, by applying L1/L2 inter-cell mobility that does not require handover, data communication can be continued even when the serving cell is changed. In scenario 2, for example, the following procedure is performed.
(1)UEは、サービングセルから、ビーム測定/サービングセルの変更のために、異なるPCIを持つセル(追加セル)のSSBの設定を受信する。
(2)UEは、異なるPCIを使用したセルのビーム測定を実行し、測定結果をサービングセルに報告する。
(3)UEは、異なるPCIを持つセルの設定(サービングセル設定)を、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えばRRC)によって受信してもよい。つまり、サービングセル変更に関する事前設定が行われる。この設定は、(1)における設定とともに行われてもよいし、別々に行われてもよい。
(4)上記の報告に基づいて、異なるPCIを持つセルのTCI状態は、サービングセルの変更に従ってL1/L2シグナリングによってアクティブ化される。TCI状態のアクティブ化及びサービングセルの変更は、別々に行われてもよい。
(5)UEは、サービングセル(サービングセルの想定)を変更し、予め設定されたUE固有(dedicated)チャネルとTCI状態を使用して受信/送信を開始する。
(1) The UE receives SSB configuration of a cell (additional cell) with a different PCI from the serving cell for beam measurement/serving cell change.
(2) The UE performs beam measurements of cells using different PCIs and reports the measurement results to the serving cell.
(3) The UE may receive a configuration of a cell having a different PCI (serving cell configuration) by higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC). That is, a pre-configuration regarding a serving cell change is performed. This configuration may be performed together with the configuration in (1) or may be performed separately.
(4) Based on the above reports, the TCI states of cells with different PCIs are activated by L1/L2 signaling according to the change of serving cell. The activation of the TCI state and the change of serving cell may be performed separately.
(5) The UE changes the serving cell (assumed serving cell) and starts receiving/transmitting using a preconfigured UE-specific (dedicated) channel and TCI state.
 つまり、シナリオ2では、サービングセル(UEにおけるサービングセルの想定)がL1/L2シグナリングによって更新される。シナリオ2は、Rel.18において適用されてもよい。 In other words, in scenario 2, the serving cell (the assumed serving cell in the UE) is updated by L1/L2 signaling. Scenario 2 may be applied in Rel. 18.
 図2Bは、Rel.18におけるUEの移動の例を示す図である。Rel.18では、サービングセルはL1/L2により切り替えられる。UEは、新しいサービングセルとの間で、UE固有チャネル/共通チャネルを受信/送信することができる。UEは、以前のサービングセルのカバレッジから外れてもよい。 Figure 2B shows an example of UE movement in Rel. 18. In Rel. 18, the serving cell is switched by L1/L2. The UE can receive/transmit UE-specific/common channels to/from the new serving cell. The UE may move out of the coverage of the previous serving cell.
(複数の候補セルの設定)
 図3は、サービングセルと候補セルの関連づけの例を示す図である。SpCell#0、SCell#1、又はSCell#2は、サービングセルであるとする。なお、SpCellは、スペシャルセル(プライマリセル(PCell)及びプライマリセカンダリセル(PSCell)を含む)を意味する。SCellは、セカンダリセルを意味する。SpCell#0は、候補セル#0-1、候補セル#0-2、候補セル#0-3に関連づけられる。SCell#1は、候補セル#1-1に関連づけられる。SCell#2は、候補セル#2-1、2-2に関連づけられる。このように、サービングセルには1以上の候補セル(候補サービングセル)が関連付けられてもよい。
(Setting multiple candidate cells)
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the association between a serving cell and a candidate cell. SpCell#0, SCell#1, or SCell#2 is assumed to be a serving cell. SpCell means a special cell (including a primary cell (PCell) and a primary secondary cell (PSCell)). SCell means a secondary cell. SpCell#0 is associated with candidate cell#0-1, candidate cell#0-2, and candidate cell#0-3. SCell#1 is associated with candidate cell#1-1. SCell#2 is associated with candidate cell#2-1, 2-2. In this way, one or more candidate cells (candidate serving cells) may be associated with a serving cell.
 サービングセルを変更する場合の候補となるセル(候補セル)の設定について、例えば、以下のオプション1,2が考えられる。 When changing the serving cell, the following options 1 and 2 can be considered for setting candidate cells (candidate cells).
<オプション1>
 Rel.17のセル間モビリティのように、ServingCellConfigにおける情報が、複数の候補セルに関する情報を含んでもよい。この場合、複数の候補セルがサービングセルと同じPDCCH/PDSCH/UL等の設定を共有する必要がある。
<Option 1>
Like inter-cell mobility in Rel.17, the information in ServingCellConfig may include information about multiple candidate cells, which need to share the same PDCCH/PDSCH/UL etc. configurations as the serving cell.
 例えば、Rel.17のセル間モビリティでは、ServingCellConfigの下に「mimoParam-r17」が追加され、PCI設定情報が追加されることが検討されている(図4A、図4B)。このフレームワークは、異なるPCIを持つセルが同じPDCCH/PDSCH/UL等の設定を共有する場合に適用される。 For example, in Rel. 17 inter-cell mobility, it is being considered to add "mimoParam-r17" under ServingCellConfig and add PCI setting information (Figures 4A and 4B). This framework is applied when cells with different PCIs share the same PDCCH/PDSCH/UL settings, etc.
 各候補セルに対して、LTE CRSパターン、RACH設定など、より多くの設定が適用されてもよい。また、セル固有のCSI-RS設定(CSI/TRS用)も考慮することで、セル毎に異なるCSI-RS機会/リソースを設定し、干渉を低減させることができる。 For each candidate cell, more settings may be applied, such as LTE CRS patterns, RACH settings, etc. Also, cell-specific CSI-RS settings (for CSI/TRS) may be taken into account, allowing different CSI-RS opportunities/resources to be set for each cell, reducing interference.
 図4Aは、オプション1のServingCellConfigの第1の例を示す図である。図4Aでは、ServingCellConfigに、追加セル(各候補セル)の設定が含まれている。図4Bは、オプション1のServingCellConfigの第2の例を示す図である。図4Bでは、ServingCellConfigに、L1/L2セル間モビリティ用の追加セル(各候補セル)の設定が含まれている。図4Aは、例えば、上記シナリオ1に対応する。図4Bは、例えば、上記シナリオ2に対応する。 FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a first example of ServingCellConfig for option 1. In FIG. 4A, the ServingCellConfig includes configurations for additional cells (candidate cells). FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a second example of ServingCellConfig for option 1. In FIG. 4B, the ServingCellConfig includes configurations for additional cells (candidate cells) for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility. FIG. 4A corresponds, for example, to the above-mentioned scenario 1. FIG. 4B corresponds, for example, to the above-mentioned scenario 2.
 図4A、図4Bのように候補セルは、RRCにより事前設定される。初期状態として、候補セルは、仕様においてアクティブ化/ディアクティブ化に固定されてもよいし、RRCによりアクティブ化/ディアクティブ化に設定されてもよい。さらに、MAC CEにより、L1/L2セルスイッチの候補セルをアクティブ化/ディアクティブ化されてもよい。L1/L2セルスイッチ指示は、アクティブセルからのセルのみ送信されてもよい。 As shown in Figures 4A and 4B, the candidate cells are pre-configured by the RRC. As an initial state, the candidate cells may be fixed to be activated/deactivated in the specification, or may be configured to be activated/deactivated by the RRC. Furthermore, the candidate cells for the L1/L2 cell switch may be activated/deactivated by the MAC CE. The L1/L2 cell switch indication may be sent only from the active cell.
<オプション2>
 複数の候補セルは、各セルに対応する完全な設定(例えば、ServingCellConfig)が適用され、キャリアアグリゲーション(CA)設定フレームワークを再利用して各サービングセルに関連付けられてもよい。UEは、各候補セルの完全な設定が提供されるので、候補セルと適切な通信を行うことができる。
<Option 2>
Multiple candidate cells may be associated with each serving cell by reusing the carrier aggregation (CA) configuration framework, with a complete configuration (e.g., ServingCellConfig) corresponding to each cell. The UE is provided with the complete configuration for each candidate cell, so that it can communicate properly with the candidate cells.
 CA設定フレームワークでは、セルグループごとにSpCellを設定し、複数のSCellを追加することができる。CAフレームワークを再利用することにより、L1/L2セル間モビリティのセルグループごとに、サービングセルが設定され、複数の候補セルが設定されてもよい(図5)。候補セルは、MAC CEによりアクティブ化/非アクティブ化されてもよい。この方法は、UE動作の複雑さを軽減するために有益であると考えられる。例として、セルグループID0のCellGroupConfigを示している。 In the CA configuration framework, it is possible to configure an SpCell for each cell group and add multiple SCells. By reusing the CA framework, a serving cell may be configured and multiple candidate cells may be configured for each cell group for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility (Figure 5). Candidate cells may be activated/deactivated by the MAC CE. This method is considered to be beneficial to reduce the complexity of UE operations. As an example, the CellGroupConfig for cell group ID 0 is shown.
 図6Aは、オプション2の第2の例を示す図である。図6Aの例では、候補セルには、MCG/SCGにおけるセルスイッチ用の共通候補セルプールが適用される。つまり、候補セルは、周波数帯に関わらず、1つのプール(グループ)として扱われる。 FIG. 6A shows a second example of Option 2. In the example of FIG. 6A, a common candidate cell pool for cell switching in the MCG/SCG is applied to the candidate cells. In other words, the candidate cells are treated as one pool (group) regardless of the frequency band.
 図6Bは、オプション2の第3の例を示す図である。図6Bの例では、複数のセルグループが設定され、L1/L2シグナリングによりセルグループスイッチが可能である。候補セルは、セルグループ毎に設定され、各グループの設定は、対応するSpCell及びSCellのインデックスを含む。図6BのCellGroupConfigは、例として、セルグループID:1のCellGroupConfigを示しているが、セルグループID:2、3のCellGroupConfigもこれとは別に設定される。 Figure 6B is a diagram showing a third example of Option 2. In the example of Figure 6B, multiple cell groups are configured, and cell group switching is possible by L1/L2 signaling. Candidate cells are configured for each cell group, and the configuration of each group includes the indexes of the corresponding SpCell and SCell. The CellGroupConfig in Figure 6B shows the CellGroupConfig for cell group ID: 1 as an example, but the CellGroupConfig for cell group IDs: 2 and 3 are also configured separately.
(サービングセル変更指示のためのシグナリング)
 サービングセル変更指示のための暗黙的な(Implicit)又は明示的な(explicit)シグナリングについて、説明する。
(Signaling for Serving Cell Change Indication)
Implicit or explicit signaling for serving cell change indication is described.
[態様1]
 態様1では、サービングセル変更指示のための暗黙的なシグナリングについて、説明する。
[Aspect 1]
In aspect 1, implicit signaling for serving cell change indication is described.
[[オプション1-1]]
 特定の制御リソースセット(Control Resource Set(CORESET))(例えば、CORESET#0、CH5 Type0-CSSのCORESET、CH6/CH7/CH8 CSSのCORESETの少なくとも1つ)が、サービングセルのPCIと異なるPCIのセルに関連付けられた1つ以上のTCI状態とともにMAC CEにより指示(アクティブ化)される場合(特定のCORESETに対し、サービングセルのPCIと異なるPCIのセルに関連付けられた1つ以上のTCI状態が、MAC CEによって指示/アクティブ化される場合)に、UEは、サービングセルを他のセル(セルx、異なるPCIを持つセル)に変更すると判断してもよい。つまり、このアクティブ化が、サービングセルを他のセルに変更することを暗黙的に示していてもよい。
[Option 1-1]
When a particular Control Resource Set (CORESET) (e.g., at least one of CORESET#0, CORESET of CH5 Type0-CSS, CORESET of CH6/CH7/CH8 CSS) is indicated (activated) by a MAC CE together with one or more TCI states associated with a cell of a PCI different from that of the serving cell (when, for a particular CORESET, one or more TCI states associated with a cell of a PCI different from that of the serving cell are indicated/activated by a MAC CE), the UE may determine to change the serving cell to another cell (cell x, a cell with a different PCI). That is, this activation may implicitly indicate changing the serving cell to another cell.
 この場合、UEは他のCORESET ID、CH6/CH7/CH8を使用する他のCORESET、又はCSSを使用する他のCORESETのビームを、上記アクティブ化されたTCI状態と同じTCI状態に更新してもよい。 In this case, the UE may update beams of other CORESET IDs, other CORESETs using CH6/CH7/CH8, or other CORESETs using CSS to the same TCI state as the activated TCI state.
[[オプション1-2]]
 MAC CEがPDSCHのTCI状態をアクティブ化/非アクティブ化するとき、MAC CEによってアクティブ化された全ての当該TCI状態が、サービングセルのPCIと異なるPCIを持つ同じセルxに関連付けられている場合に、UEは、サービングセルを他のセル(セルx)に変更すると判断してもよい。つまり、この関連付けが、サービングセルを他のセルへ変更することを暗黙的に示していてもよい。
[Option 1-2]
When the MAC CE activates/deactivates the TCI states of the PDSCH, if all such TCI states activated by the MAC CE are associated with the same cell x with a PCI different from that of the serving cell, the UE may determine to change the serving cell to another cell (cell x), i.e., the association may implicitly indicate the change of the serving cell to another cell.
 このオプションが適用するケースでは、NW(基地局)がサービングセルを変更しない場合、MAC CEが、異なるPCIを持つセルに関連付けられたPDSCHのTCI状態をアクティブ化するときに、別のセル(たとえば、現在のサービングセル又は第2の異なるPCIを持つセル)に関連するTCI状態も含める必要がある。 In cases where this option applies, if the NW (base station) does not change the serving cell, when the MAC CE activates the TCI state of a PDSCH associated with a cell with a different PCI, it must also include the TCI state related to another cell (e.g., the current serving cell or a cell with a second different PCI).
[[オプション1-3]]
 MAC CEが統一TCI状態(例えばRel.17の統一TCIフレームワークに対応する)をアクティブ化/非アクティブ化し、アクティブ化された全ての統一TCI状態が、異なるPCIを持つ同じセルxに関連付けられている場合に、UEは、サービングセルを他のセル(セルx)に変更すると判断してもよい。つまり、この関連付けが、サービングセルを他のセルへ変更することを暗黙的に示していてもよい。
[Option 1-3]
When the MAC CE activates/deactivates unified TCI states (e.g., corresponding to the unified TCI framework in Rel. 17) and all the activated unified TCI states are associated with the same cell x with different PCIs, the UE may determine to change the serving cell to another cell (cell x), i.e., the association may implicitly indicate the serving cell change to another cell.
[態様2]
 態様2では、サービングセル変更指示のための明示的な(explicit)シグナリングについて、説明する。態様2は、例えば上述のシナリオ2が適用される。
[Aspect 2]
In aspect 2, explicit signaling for a serving cell change instruction will be described. In aspect 2, for example, the above-mentioned scenario 2 is applied.
[[オプション2-1]]
 以下、サービングセル変更指示の例を説明する。なお、非サービングセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化、サービングセルの変更、サービングセルの物理セルIDとは異なる物理セルIDを持つ他のセル(非サービングセル)と送信/受信することは互いに読み替えられてもよい。
[Option 2-1]
An example of a serving cell change instruction will be described below. Note that activation/deactivation of a non-serving cell, change of a serving cell, and transmission/reception with another cell (non-serving cell) having a physical cell ID different from the physical cell ID of the serving cell may be read as interchangeable.
 UEは、非サービングセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化に用いる、非サービングセルに対応する次の(1)~(3)を示すフィールド(情報)の少なくとも1つを含む、新しいMAC CEを受信してもよい。UEは、当該MAC CEを受信した場合、サービングセルを他のセル(非サービングセル)に変更すると判断してもよい。また、UEは、当該情報に基づいて、非サービングセルとのDL信号/UL信号の送受信を制御してもよい。なお、当該非サービングセルは1つでもよいし複数でもよい。以下に示す例では、複数の非サービングセルインデックスを示す複数のフィールドを含むMAC CEを適用する。 The UE may receive a new MAC CE including at least one of the fields (information) indicating the following (1) to (3) corresponding to the non-serving cell, which is used for activating/deactivating the non-serving cell. When the UE receives the MAC CE, the UE may decide to change the serving cell to another cell (non-serving cell). The UE may also control transmission and reception of DL signals/UL signals with the non-serving cell based on the information. Note that the non-serving cell may be one or multiple. In the example shown below, a MAC CE including multiple fields indicating multiple non-serving cell indexes is applied.
(1)サービングセルID。
(2)BWP ID。
(3)アクティベーションに用いる非サービングセルID。非サービングセルIDは、非サービングセルに対応する(非サービングセルを識別可能な)任意の情報に置き換えられてもよい。
(1) Serving cell ID.
(2) BWP ID.
(3) Non-serving cell ID used for activation The non-serving cell ID may be replaced with any information corresponding to a non-serving cell (capable of identifying a non-serving cell).
 (3)の例として、例えば(3-1)~(3-5)のいずれかが適用されてもよい。
(3-1)PCI(直接用いられるPCI)。例えば、10ビットが使用される。
(3-2)非サービングセルの再作成インデックス(新しいID)。新しいIDは、PCIの一部に関連づけられ、UEが利用する(利用可能な)サービングセル及び非サービングセルにのみ設定されてもよい。新しいIDは、PCIよりもビット数を削減することができる。
(3-3)CSI報告設定ID(CSI-ReportConfigId)(CSI-ReportConfigが1つ又は複数の非サービングセルに対応する場合)。
(3-4)CSIリソース設定ID(CSI-ResourceConfigId)(CSI-ResourceConfigIdが1つ又は複数の非サービングセルに対応する場合)。
(3-5)各非サービングセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化を示すビットマップ。ビットマップのサイズ(ビット数)は、このCC上で設定された非サービングセルの数と同じであってもよい。例えば、3つの非サービングセルのうち、2番目の非サービングセルをアクティブ化する場合、「010」が設定される。
As an example of (3), for example, any of (3-1) to (3-5) may be applied.
(3-1) PCI (PCI used directly). For example, 10 bits are used.
(3-2) Re-creation index (new ID) of non-serving cells. The new ID is associated with a part of the PCI and may be set only to serving cells and non-serving cells used (available) by the UE. The new ID can reduce the number of bits compared to the PCI.
(3-3) CSI reporting configuration ID (CSI-ReportConfigId) (when the CSI-ReportConfig corresponds to one or more non-serving cells).
(3-4) CSI resource configuration ID (CSI-ResourceConfigId) (when CSI-ResourceConfigId corresponds to one or more non-serving cells).
(3-5) A bitmap indicating the activation/deactivation of each non-serving cell. The size (number of bits) of the bitmap may be the same as the number of non-serving cells configured on this CC. For example, when activating the second non-serving cell among three non-serving cells, "010" is set.
 MAC CEに含まれる情報の少なくとも1つがDCIに含まれてもよい。又は、MAC CEによりアクティベートされたサービングセルのうちの少なくとも一つが、DCIにより指示されてもよい。MAC CE/DCIは、ターゲットセル(変更後のサービングセル)上において、UEが監視するDLビームを認識できるように、異なるPCIを持つセルからのTCI状態/SSB/CSI-RSを指示するフィールドを含んでいてもよい。UEは、当該TCI状態/SSB/CSI-RSを用いて、ビーム報告(CSI報告)を作成し、送信してもよい。 At least one of the pieces of information included in the MAC CE may be included in the DCI. Or, at least one of the serving cells activated by the MAC CE may be indicated by the DCI. The MAC CE/DCI may include a field indicating the TCI status/SSB/CSI-RS from a cell with a different PCI so that the UE can recognize the DL beam to be monitored on the target cell (the serving cell after the change). The UE may create and transmit a beam report (CSI report) using the TCI status/SSB/CSI-RS.
[[オプション2-2]]
 UEは、既存のMAC CEに新しい1ビットのフィールド「C」を追加したMAC CEを受信してもよい。当該フィールドは、サービングセルの変更を行うかどうかを示す。UEは、当該MAC CEを受信し、当該フィールドに基づいて、サービングセルを他のセルに変更するかを判断してもよい。
[Option 2-2]
The UE may receive a MAC CE in which a new 1-bit field "C" is added to the existing MAC CE. The field indicates whether to change the serving cell. The UE may receive the MAC CE and determine whether to change the serving cell to another cell based on the field.
[[オプション2-3]]
 オプション2-2におけるMAC CEに対して、さらに、サービングセルインデックス/PCI/その他のID(上述のオプション2-1の新しいIDなど)を示すフィールド、ターゲットセル(変更後のサービングセル)のTCI状態/SSB/CSI-RSのフィールドを、MAC CEに含めてもよい。
[Option 2-3]
For the MAC CE in Option 2-2, a field indicating the serving cell index/PCI/other ID (such as the new ID in Option 2-1 described above) and a field indicating the TCI state/SSB/CSI-RS of the target cell (the serving cell after the change) may be included in the MAC CE.
 このように、サービングセル変更指示のため指示が、MAC CE/DCIにより指示されるので、UEは、適切にサービングセルの変更を行うことができる。 In this way, since the instruction to change the serving cell is given by the MAC CE/DCI, the UE can appropriately change the serving cell.
[サービングセルスイッチ例1]
 図7は、サービングセルスイッチ例1を示す図である。例えば、MCG/SCGのサービングセルSpCell#0において、L1/L2シグナリングにより、候補セル#0-2にサービングセルを変更することが指示された場合、候補セル#0-2が新たなサービングセルSpCell#0となる。また、例えば、MCG/SCGのサービングセルSCell#2において、L1/L2シグナリングにより、候補セル#2-1にサービングセルを変更することが指示された場合、候補セル#2-1が新たなサービングセルSCell#2となる。
[Serving Cell Switch Example 1]
7 is a diagram showing a serving cell switch example 1. For example, in the serving cell SpCell#0 of the MCG/SCG, when the serving cell is instructed to be changed to the candidate cell #0-2 by L1/L2 signaling, the candidate cell #0-2 becomes the new serving cell SpCell#0. Also, for example, in the serving cell SCell#2 of the MCG/SCG, when the serving cell is instructed to be changed to the candidate cell #2-1 by L1/L2 signaling, the candidate cell #2-1 becomes the new serving cell SCell#2.
[サービングセルスイッチ例2]
 RRC/MAC CEは、セルグループ、バンド、FR、UEごとにグローバル候補セルID(cell#0,...,5)を設定することができる。UEは、サービングセルのスイッチを、当該グローバル候補セルIDにより指示されてもよい。
[Serving Cell Switch Example 2]
The RRC/MAC CE can configure a global candidate cell ID (cell #0,...,5) for each cell group, band, FR, and UE. The UE may be instructed to switch serving cells by the global candidate cell ID.
 図8は、サービングセルスイッチ例2を示す図である。図6Aと同様に、複数の候補セルのプールを設定し、L1/L2シグナリングによりサービングセルをプール内の任意の(アクティブ化された)候補セルに切り替えることができる。この場合、設定された候補セルは、L1/L2シグナリングに基づいてSpCell又はSellのいずれかになることができる。 Figure 8 shows a serving cell switch example 2. As in Figure 6A, a pool of multiple candidate cells can be configured, and the serving cell can be switched to any (activated) candidate cell in the pool by L1/L2 signaling. In this case, the configured candidate cell can be either an SpCell or a Sell based on L1/L2 signaling.
 UEは、MAC CE/DCIにより、サービングセルの変更(セル#2-1から候補セル4へ)の指示を受信してもよい。そして、指示された候補セル#4が新しいセルグループのSpCellとなる。 The UE may receive an instruction to change the serving cell (from cell #2-1 to candidate cell #4) via MAC CE/DCI. Then, the indicated candidate cell #4 becomes the SpCell of the new cell group.
[サービングセルスイッチ例3]
 RRC/MAC CEは、セルグループ、バンド、FR、UEごとにグローバル候補セルID(cell#0-1、#0-1,...,2-2)を設定することができる。UEは、サービングセルの切り替えを、当該グローバル候補セルIDにより指示されてもよい。
[Serving Cell Switch Example 3]
The RRC/MAC CE can set a global candidate cell ID (cell #0-1, #0-1, ..., 2-2) for each cell group, band, FR, and UE. The UE may be instructed to switch the serving cell by the global candidate cell ID.
 図9は、サービングセルスイッチ例3を示す図である。UEは、MAC CE/DCIにより、サービングセルの変更(セル#2-0からセル#2-1へ)の指示を受信する。そして、指示されたセル#2-1が新しいセルグループのSpCellとなる。また、指示されたセル#2-1と同じセルグループのセル(cell#0-0、cell#1-0)が、Scell#1、Scell#2になる。即ち、サービングセルグループがスイッチされる。 Figure 9 shows serving cell switch example 3. The UE receives an instruction to change the serving cell (from cell #2-0 to cell #2-1) via MAC CE/DCI. The indicated cell #2-1 then becomes the SpCell of the new cell group. Also, the cells (cell #0-0, cell #1-0) in the same cell group as the indicated cell #2-1 become Scell #1 and Scell #2. In other words, the serving cell group is switched.
(分析)
 上述のように、マルチTRPを適用した場合に、L1/L2セル間モビリティにより、セルスイッチが行われることが検討されている。例えば、現在のSCell/PCellが、候補セルとなる(つまり、ターゲットPcell/SCell、候補セルが、現在のSCell/PCellである)ことも考えられる。その場合の、設定/制御について明確になっていない。これによりセルスイッチ後の処理が適切に行われず、例えば、通信スループットが低下するなどの問題が生じるおそれがある。
(analysis)
As described above, when multi-TRP is applied, cell switching is considered to be performed by L1/L2 inter-cell mobility. For example, it is possible that the current SCell/PCell becomes a candidate cell (i.e., the target Pcell/SCell, the candidate cell is the current SCell/PCell). In that case, the setting/control is not clear. This may cause problems such as poor processing after cell switching, for example, a decrease in communication throughput.
 例えば、現在のScell/Pcellを候補セルとしてどのように設定するかが明確になっていない。また、セルが切り替わった際、特にターゲットセルが現在のScellの場合、既存のScellをどのように扱うかが明確でない。これらが明確でない場合、L1/L2セル間モビリティによるの連続的なセルスイッチが円滑に行われないおそれがある。 For example, it is not clear how to set the current Scell/Pcell as a candidate cell. Also, when cells are switched, it is not clear how to handle the existing Scell, especially when the target cell is the current Scell. If these are not clear, there is a risk that continuous cell switching due to L1/L2 inter-cell mobility will not be performed smoothly.
 そこで、本発明者らは、セルスイッチの際の設定/処理を適切に行うことができる端末、無線通信方法及び基地局を着想した。 The inventors therefore came up with the idea of a terminal, a wireless communication method, and a base station that can properly perform settings/processing during a cell switch.
 以下、本開示に係る実施形態について、図面を参照して詳細に説明する。各実施形態に係る無線通信方法は、それぞれ単独で適用されてもよいし、組み合わせて適用されてもよい。 Below, embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The wireless communication methods according to the embodiments may be applied independently or in combination.
 本開示において、「A/B」及び「A及びBの少なくとも一方」は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「A/B/C」は、「A、B及びCの少なくとも1つ」を意味してもよい。 In this disclosure, "A/B" and "at least one of A and B" may be interpreted as interchangeable. Also, in this disclosure, "A/B/C" may mean "at least one of A, B, and C."
 本開示において、通知、アクティベート、ディアクティベート、指示(又は指定(indicate))、選択(select)、設定(configure)、更新(update)、決定(determine)などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、サポートする、制御する、制御できる、動作する、動作できるなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, terms such as notify, activate, deactivate, indicate (or indicate), select, configure, update, and determine may be read as interchangeable. In this disclosure, terms such as support, control, capable of control, operate, and capable of operating may be read as interchangeable.
 本開示において、無線リソース制御(Radio Resource Control(RRC))、RRCパラメータ、RRCメッセージ、上位レイヤパラメータ、フィールド、情報要素(Information Element(IE))、設定などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、Medium Access Control制御要素(MAC Control Element(CE))、更新コマンド、アクティベーション/ディアクティベーションコマンドなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, Radio Resource Control (RRC), RRC parameters, RRC messages, higher layer parameters, fields, information elements (IEs), settings, etc. may be interchangeable. In this disclosure, Medium Access Control (MAC Control Element (CE)), update commands, activation/deactivation commands, etc. may be interchangeable.
 本開示において、上位レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、Radio Resource Control(RRC)シグナリング、Medium Access Control(MAC)シグナリング、ブロードキャスト情報などのいずれか、又はこれらの組み合わせであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, higher layer signaling may be, for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, or any combination thereof.
 本開示において、MACシグナリングは、例えば、MAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(MAC CE))、MAC Protocol Data Unit(PDU)などを用いてもよい。ブロードキャスト情報は、例えば、マスタ情報ブロック(Master Information Block(MIB))、システム情報ブロック(System Information Block(SIB))、最低限のシステム情報(Remaining Minimum System Information(RMSI))、その他のシステム情報(Other System Information(OSI))などであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, the MAC signaling may use, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc. The broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), Remaining Minimum System Information (RMSI), Other System Information (OSI), etc.
 本開示において、物理レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、下りリンク制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))、上りリンク制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI))などであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, the physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI), etc.
 本開示において、インデックス、識別子(Identifier(ID))、インディケーター、リソースIDなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、シーケンス、リスト、セット、グループ、群、クラスター、サブセット、プールなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms index, identifier (ID), indicator, resource ID, etc. may be interchangeable. In this disclosure, the terms sequence, list, set, group, cluster, subset, pool, etc. may be interchangeable.
 本開示において、パネル、UEパネル、パネルグループ、ビーム、ビームグループ、プリコーダ、Uplink(UL)送信エンティティ、送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))、基地局、空間関係情報(Spatial Relation Information(SRI))、空間関係、SRSリソースインディケーター(SRS Resource Indicator(SRI))、制御リソースセット(COntrol REsource SET(CORESET))、Physical Downlink Shared Channel(PDSCH)、コードワード(Codeword(CW))、トランスポートブロック(Transport Block(TB))、参照信号(Reference Signal(RS))、アンテナポート(例えば、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))ポート)、アンテナポートグループ(例えば、DMRSポートグループ)、グループ(例えば、空間関係グループ、符号分割多重(Code Division Multiplexing(CDM))グループ、参照信号グループ、CORESETグループ、Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH)グループ、PUCCHリソースグループ)、リソース(例えば、参照信号リソース、SRSリソース)、リソースセット(例えば、参照信号リソースセット)、CORESETプール、下りリンクのTransmission Configuration Indication state(TCI状態)(DL TCI状態)、上りリンクのTCI状態(UL TCI状態)、統一されたTCI状態(unified TCI state)、共通TCI状態(common TCI state)、擬似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))、QCL想定などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms panel, UE panel, panel group, beam, beam group, precoder, Uplink (UL) transmitting entity, Transmission/Reception Point (TRP), base station, Spatial Relation Information (SRI), spatial relation, SRS Resource Indicator (SRI), Control Resource Set (CONTROLLER RESOLUTION SET (CORESET)), Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), Codeword (CW), Transport Block (TB), Reference Signal (RS), Antenna Port (e.g., DeModulation Reference Signal (DMRS)) port), Antenna Port group (e.g., DMRS port group), group (e.g., spatial relationship group, Code Division Multiplexing (CDM) group, reference signal group, CORESET group, Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) group, PUCCH resource group), resource (e.g., reference signal resource, SRS resource), resource set (e.g., reference signal resource set), CORESET pool, downlink Transmission Configuration Indication state (TCI state) (DL TCI state), uplink TCI state (UL TCI state), unified TCI state, common TCI state, quasi-co-location (QCL), QCL assumption, etc. may be read as interchangeable.
 また、空間関係情報Identifier(ID)(TCI状態ID)と空間関係情報(TCI状態)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。「空間関係情報」は、「空間関係情報のセット」、「1つ又は複数の空間関係情報」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。TCI状態及びTCIは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, the spatial relationship information identifier (ID) (TCI state ID) and the spatial relationship information (TCI state) may be read as interchangeable. "Spatial relationship information" may be read as "set of spatial relationship information", "one or more pieces of spatial relationship information", etc. TCI state and TCI may be read as interchangeable.
 本開示において、ドロップ、中止、キャンセル、パンクチャ、レートマッチ、延期(postpone)、送信しない、などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, terms such as drop, abort, cancel, puncture, rate match, postpone, do not transmit, etc. may be interpreted as interchangeable.
 本開示において、セルグループ、サービングセルグループ、マスターセルグループ(MCG)、セカンダリセルグループ(SCG)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。L1/L2、L1/L2シグナリング、DCI/MAC CEは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。サービングセルは、PDSCHを送信するセルに置き換えられてもよい。候補セルは、L1/L2セル間モビリティによりサービングセルとなる候補のセルを意味してもよい。 In the present disclosure, cell group, serving cell group, master cell group (MCG), and secondary cell group (SCG) may be interchangeable. L1/L2, L1/L2 signaling, and DCI/MAC CE may be interchangeable. A serving cell may be replaced with a cell that transmits a PDSCH. A candidate cell may refer to a cell that is a candidate to become a serving cell through L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
 本開示において、セル、PCI、サービングセル、SpCell、ソースサービングセル、CC、BWP、CC内のBWP、バンド、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、追加セル、他のセル、非サービングセル、異なるPCIを持つセル、候補セル、候補サービングセル、現在のサービングセルのPCIとは異なるPCIを持つセル、別のサービングセル、ターゲットセル、隣接セルは、互いに言い換えられてもよい。本開示において、スイッチ、変更、更新は互いに読み替えられてもよい。サービングセルは、スイッチ前のサービングセル、又はスイッチ後のサービングセルに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, cell, PCI, serving cell, SpCell, source serving cell, CC, BWP, BWP in CC, band may be interchanged. In the present disclosure, additional cell, other cell, non-serving cell, cell with a different PCI, candidate cell, candidate serving cell, cell with a PCI different from the PCI of the current serving cell, another serving cell, target cell, neighboring cell may be interchanged. In the present disclosure, switch, change, update may be interchanged. Serving cell may be interchanged with serving cell before switch or serving cell after switch.
 サービングセル、SpCell、PSCell、PCell、SCellは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。セルスイッチコマンド、セル変更指示、サービングセル変更指示は、互いに言い換えられてもよい。 Serving cell, SpCell, PSCell, PCell, and SCell may be interchangeable. Cell switch command, cell change instruction, and serving cell change instruction may be interchangeable.
(無線通信方法)
<実施形態1>
 現在のサービングセルを候補セルとして設定する場合の処理について説明する。本実施形態は、例えば上述のL1/L2セル間モビリティのシナリオ2が適用されてもよい。UEは、上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングにより、サービングセルがレイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)セル間モビリティの候補セルとなり得るかどうかを示す設定/指示/パラメータを受信し、当該設定/指示/パラメータに基づいて、サービングセルのスイッチを制御してもよい。
(Wireless communication method)
<Embodiment 1>
A process for setting a current serving cell as a candidate cell will be described. For example, the above-mentioned L1/L2 inter-cell mobility scenario 2 may be applied to this embodiment. The UE may receive a setting/indication/parameter indicating whether the serving cell can be a candidate cell for layer 1/layer 2 (L1/L2) inter-cell mobility by higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling, and may control the switch of the serving cell based on the setting/indication/parameter.
[態様1.1]
 UEは、上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングにより、セルグループ(MCG/SCG)毎に、セルグループ内の全てのサービングセルがL1/L2セル間モビリティの候補セル(またはターゲットSpCell/SCellの候補)となり得るかどうかを示す設定/指示/パラメータを受信してもよい。つまり、UEは、セルグループ内の全てのサービングセルに共通の(1つの)設定/指示/パラメータを受信してもよい。
[Aspect 1.1]
The UE may receive, via higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling, configurations/indications/parameters for each cell group (MCG/SCG) indicating whether all serving cells in the cell group can be candidate cells (or candidates for target SpCell/SCell) for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility, i.e., the UE may receive a (single) configuration/indication/parameter common to all serving cells in the cell group.
 当該サービングセルに共通の設定/指示/パラメータが、「No」(候補セルとなり得るセルがない)ことを示す場合、候補セルは、事前にRRCシグナリング等により設定された候補セルのみが適用される。例えば、候補セルには、後述するタイプCのセルは適用されなくてもよい。 If the setting/instruction/parameter common to the serving cell indicates "No" (there is no cell that can be a candidate cell), only candidate cells that have been set in advance by RRC signaling, etc. are applied as candidate cells. For example, type C cells, which will be described later, do not need to be applied as candidate cells.
 図10は、態様1.1のサービングセルの設定例を示す図である。図10では、UEは、SpCell#0、SCell#1、SCell#2を含むセルグループについて、L1/L2セル間モビリティの候補セルとなり得ることを示す設定/指示/パラメータを受信する。なお、候補セル#3~#7は、予めRRCシグナリング等により、候補セルになり得ることが設定されていてもよい。 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a serving cell in aspect 1.1. In FIG. 10, the UE receives a configuration/instruction/parameter indicating that a cell group including SpCell#0, SCell#1, and SCell#2 can be a candidate cell for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility. Note that candidate cells #3 to #7 may be configured in advance as candidate cells by RRC signaling, etc.
[態様1.2]
 UEは、上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングにより、セルグループ(MCG/SCG)内の各サービングセル/CCがL1/L2セル間モビリティの候補セル(またはターゲットSpCell/SCellの候補)となり得るかどうかを示す設定/指示/パラメータを受信してもよい。つまり、UEは、各サービングセルに対して個別の設定/指示/パラメータを受信してもよい。
[Aspect 1.2]
The UE may receive configurations/indications/parameters via higher layer/physical layer signaling indicating whether each serving cell/CC in a cell group (MCG/SCG) can be a candidate cell (or a candidate for the target SpCell/SCell) for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility, i.e., the UE may receive separate configurations/indications/parameters for each serving cell.
 図11は、態様1.2のサービングセルの設定例を示す図である。図11では、UEは、SCell#1について、L1/L2セル間モビリティの候補セルとなり得ることを示す設定/指示/パラメータを受信する。UEは、SpCell#0、SCell#2について、L1/L2セル間モビリティの候補セルとなり得ないことを示す設定/指示/パラメータを受信してもよい。なお、候補セル#3~#7は、予めRRCシグナリング等により、候補セルになり得ることが設定されていてもよい。 FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a serving cell in aspect 1.2. In FIG. 11, the UE receives a configuration/instruction/parameter indicating that SCell#1 can be a candidate cell for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility. The UE may receive a configuration/instruction/parameter indicating that SpCell#0 and SCell#2 cannot be candidate cells for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility. Note that candidate cells #3 to #7 may be configured in advance to be candidate cells by RRC signaling, etc.
[補足]
 なお、態様1.1、1.2において、セルグループに設定された候補セルは、L1/L2セル間モビリティのSpCellセルスイッチおよびL1/L2セル間モビリティのScellセルスイッチの両方の候補セルプール(グループ)に含まれていてもよい。つまり、候補セルとなるサービングセルが、SpCellまたはScellにスイッチされてもよい。
[supplement]
In addition, in aspects 1.1 and 1.2, the candidate cell set in the cell group may be included in both the candidate cell pools (groups) of the SpCell cell switch of the L1/L2 inter-cell mobility and the Scell cell switch of the L1/L2 inter-cell mobility. In other words, the serving cell that is the candidate cell may be switched to the SpCell or the Scell.
 UEは、サービングセル(SpCell/SCell)を候補セルとしてサポートする(候補セルになり得る)ことを示すUE能力情報を送信(報告)してもよい。例えば、態様1.1が適用される場合、UEは、セルグループ内の全てのサービングセルを候補セルとしてサポートすることを示すUE能力情報を送信してもよい。例えば、態様1.2が適用される場合、UEは、セルグループ内の各サービングセルを候補セルとしてサポートする(候補セルになり得る)こことを示すUE能力情報を送信してもよい。 The UE may transmit (report) UE capability information indicating that it supports a serving cell (SpCell/SCell) as a candidate cell (can be a candidate cell). For example, when aspect 1.1 is applied, the UE may transmit UE capability information indicating that it supports all serving cells in a cell group as candidate cells. For example, when aspect 1.2 is applied, the UE may transmit UE capability information indicating that it supports each serving cell in a cell group as a candidate cell (can be a candidate cell).
 本実施形態によれば、サービングセル(SpCell/SCell)が候補セルとなる場合に、適切な設定を行うことができる。 According to this embodiment, appropriate settings can be made when the serving cell (SpCell/SCell) is a candidate cell.
<実施形態2.1>
 UEは、L1/L2シグナリングによりSpCellのセルスイッチコマンドを受信し、候補セル(ターゲットセル)のタイプに基づいて、当該候補セルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化のステータスについて異なる想定を行ってもよい。
<Embodiment 2.1>
The UE receives the cell switch command for the SpCell through L1/L2 signaling and may make different assumptions about the activation/deactivation status of a candidate cell (target cell) based on the type of the candidate cell.
 セルスイッチコマンド(サービングセル変更指示)がL1/L2シグナリングにより送信された場合、UEは、RRC再構成(reconfiguration)信号を受信しない限り、現在のSCellのRRC設定および候補セルのRRC設定を維持/保存/保持(keep/store/maintain)してもよい。セルスイッチは、シングルセルスイッチ、マルチセルスイッチまたはセルグループスイッチのいずれかであってよい。 If a cell switch command (serving cell change instruction) is sent by L1/L2 signaling, the UE may keep/store/maintain the RRC settings of the current SCell and the RRC settings of the candidate cells, unless it receives an RRC reconfiguration signal. The cell switch may be either a single cell switch, a multi-cell switch or a cell group switch.
 なお、本開示における説明のために、以下の4種類のセルを定義する。なお、本実施形態は、第1の実施形態の態様1.1または態様1.2の両方に適用可能である。各タイプのセルは、例えば、図12のように適用される。なお、本開示において、タイプA、タイプB,タイプC、タイプDは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。
タイプA:SpCell。
タイプB:候補セルとして指示されていないScell。
タイプC:候補セルとして指示されたScell。
タイプD:RRCによって設定された候補セル(オリジナルのSCellではない)。
For the purpose of explanation in this disclosure, the following four types of cells are defined. This embodiment is applicable to both aspect 1.1 and aspect 1.2 of the first embodiment. Each type of cell is applied, for example, as shown in FIG. 12. In this disclosure, type A, type B, type C, and type D may be read as interchangeable with each other.
Type A: SpCell.
Type B: An Scell that is not designated as a candidate cell.
Type C: Scell designated as a candidate cell.
Type D: Candidate cell configured by RRC (not the original SCell).
[ケースa]
 L1/L2シグナリングによりSpCellのセルスイッチコマンドが送信され、候補セル(ターゲットセル、新たにSpCellとなるセル)がScellでない場合(すなわち、ターゲットセルがタイプDセルである場合)、タイプDの候補セルに対して、次のオプション1または2が適用され、タイプBのサービングセルに対して、次のオプション3B~5Bが適用され、タイプCのサービングセル/候補セルに対して、次のオプション3C~5Cが適用され、タイプAのSpCellに対して、次のオプション6が適用される。
[Case a]
When a cell switch command for the SpCell is sent via L1/L2 signaling and the candidate cell (target cell, the cell that will become the new SpCell) is not an Scell (i.e., the target cell is a type D cell), the following options 1 or 2 are applied to the type D candidate cell, the following options 3B to 5B are applied to the type B serving cell, the following options 3C to 5C are applied to the type C serving cell/candidate cell, and the following option 6 is applied to the type A SpCell.
《オプション1》
 UEは、各タイプDのセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化のステータスが変更されないと想定してもよい。したがって、順次、L1/L2セル変更が可能であってもよい。
Option 1
The UE may assume that the activation/deactivation status of each type-D cell remains unchanged, and thus sequential L1/L2 cell changes may be possible.
《オプション2》
 UEは、セルスイッチコマンドと同じシグナリング(同時のシグナリング)において、各タイプDセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化の指示を受信してもよい。
Option 2
The UE may receive an indication of activation/deactivation of each type D cell in the same signaling (concurrent signaling) as the cell switch command.
 なお、オプション1または2において、候補セル(ターゲットセル、新たにSpCellとなるセル)は、新しいSpCellになった時点で、アクティブ化シグナルの有無に関わらず、アクティブ化されてもよい。 In addition, in options 1 and 2, the candidate cell (target cell, the cell that will become the new SpCell) may be activated when it becomes the new SpCell, regardless of whether an activation signal is present.
《オプション3B》
 UEは、各タイプBセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化のステータスが変更されないと想定してもよい。
<<Option 3B>>
The UE may assume that the activation/deactivation status of each type-B cell remains unchanged.
《オプション4B》
 UEは、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化に関する新しい指示を受信しない場合、各タイプBセルが非アクティブ化されたと想定してもよい。
<<Option 4B>>
The UE may assume that each type-B cell is deactivated if it does not receive a new activation/deactivation instruction.
《オプション5B》
 UEは、セルスイッチコマンドと同じシグナリング(同時のシグナリング)において、各タイプBセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化の指示を受信してもよい。
<<Option 5B>>
The UE may receive an indication of activation/deactivation of each type-B cell in the same signaling (concurrent signaling) as the cell switch command.
《オプション3C》
 UEは、各タイプCセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化のステータスが変更されないと想定してもよい。
<<Option 3C>>
The UE may assume that the activation/deactivation status of each type-C cell remains unchanged.
《オプション4C》
 UEは、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化に関する新しい指示を受信しない場合、各タイプCセルが非アクティブ化されたと想定してもよい。
<<Option 4C>>
The UE may assume that each Type-C cell has been deactivated if it does not receive a new activation/deactivation instruction.
《オプション5C》
 UEは、セルスイッチコマンドと同じシグナリング(同時のシグナリング)において、各タイプCセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化の指示を受信してもよい。
<<Option 5C>>
The UE may receive activation/deactivation indications for each type-C cell in the same signaling (concurrent signaling) as the cell switch command.
《オプション6》
 UEにセルスイッチコマンドが送信された後、タイプAのSpCellは、タイプDの候補セルとなる。UEは、そのセルの状態がアクティブ化または非アクティブ化されていると想定してもよい。または、UEは、セルスイッチコマンドにより、このセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化を指示されてもよい。
Option 6:
After the cell switch command is sent to the UE, the SpCell of type A becomes a candidate cell of type D. The UE may assume that the state of the cell is activated or deactivated, or the UE may be instructed to activate/deactivate the cell by the cell switch command.
[ケースb]
 ケースbは、SpCellのセルスイッチコマンドがL1/L2シグナリングにより送信され、候補セル(ターゲットセル、新たにSpCellとなるセル)がタイプCのSCellであるケースである。この場合、UEは、ターゲットセルであるタイプCのSCellが新しいSpCellになるため、アクティブ化のシグナリングの有無に関わらず、そのセルの状態がアクティブ化されると想定してもよい。その他のセルについては、ケースaの各オプションが同様に適用されてもよい。
[Case b]
Case b is a case where the cell switch command for the SpCell is sent by L1/L2 signaling and the candidate cell (target cell, the cell that will become the new SpCell) is a type C SCell. In this case, the UE may assume that the state of the target cell, the type C SCell, is activated because it will become the new SpCell, regardless of the presence or absence of activation signaling. For other cells, each option in case a may be applied similarly.
[ケースc]
 UEは、L1/L2シグナリング信号によりSCellのセルスイッチコマンドを受信する場合、ケースaまたはケースbと同様のオプションが適用されてもよい。つまり、ケースaまたはケースbのSpCellがSCellに読み替えられてもよい。
[Case c]
When the UE receives a cell switch command for the SCell through an L1/L2 signaling signal, the same option as in case a or case b may be applied. That is, the SpCell in case a or case b may be replaced with the SCell.
[補足]
 セルスイッチコマンドは、各候補セル/各サービングセルの、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化の状態の指示を含んでいてもよい。または、セルスイッチコマンドは、当該指示とともにUEに送信されてもよい。
[supplement]
The cell switch command may include an indication of the activation/deactivation status of each candidate/serving cell, or the cell switch command may be sent to the UE together with said indication.
 例えば、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化の指示として、ビットマップが使用されてもよい。この場合、各ビットが、各候補セル/各サービングセルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化を示してもよい。また、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化の指示では、一部または全部のセルインデックスが明示的に示されていてもよい。セルインデックスが送信されたことが、当該セルのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化を暗示的に示してもよい。 For example, a bitmap may be used as the activation/deactivation indication. In this case, each bit may indicate activation/deactivation of each candidate cell/each serving cell. Also, some or all cell indices may be explicitly indicated in the activation/deactivation indication. The transmission of a cell index may implicitly indicate activation/deactivation of that cell.
 例えば、セルスイッチコマンドとして、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化の状態の指示とは別のシグナリング(例えば、MAC CE/DCI)が使用されてもよい。例えば、UEは、特定の/一部のセル(セルスイッチのソースセル、タイプBセル、タイプCセル、タイプDセルなど)のアクティブ化/非アクティブ化の状態のみを指示されてもよい。 For example, a signaling other than the activation/deactivation state indication (e.g., MAC CE/DCI) may be used as the cell switch command. For example, the UE may be instructed only on the activation/deactivation state of specific/some cells (such as the source cell of the cell switch, type B cells, type C cells, type D cells, etc.).
 UEは、セルスイッチの際に他のセル(候補セル/サービングセル)のアクティブ化/非アクティブ化状態の更新をサポートするかを示すUE能力情報を送信してもよい。 The UE may transmit UE capability information indicating whether it supports updating the activation/deactivation status of other cells (candidate cells/serving cells) during a cell switch.
<実施形態2.2>
 実施形態2.2では、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化だけでなく、セルの役割(例えば、サービングセル/候補セル、タイプA/B/C/Dセルの役割)の変更について説明する。例えば、セルが切り替わると、ターゲットセル(候補セル)はサービングセルになり、かつアクティブ化もされる。元の(変更前の)サービングセルについて、以下の各オプションが適用されてもよい。
<Embodiment 2.2>
In embodiment 2.2, not only activation/deactivation but also cell role change (e.g., serving cell/candidate cell, type A/B/C/D cell role) is described. For example, when a cell is switched, the target cell (candidate cell) becomes the serving cell and is also activated. For the original (pre-change) serving cell, the following options may be applied:
《オプション1》
 元のサービングセルは、候補セルとなる。実施形態2.1に基づいてアクティブ化/非アクティブ化が決定されてもよい。
Option 1
The original serving cell becomes the candidate cell. The activation/deactivation may be determined based on embodiment 2.1.
《オプション2》
 元のサービングセルは、サービングセルのままであり、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化されてもよい。このオプションは、例えば、SpCell#0とScell#1の役割が交換され、SpCell#0がScellになり、Scell#1が新しいSpCellになるケースを想定する。
Option 2
The original serving cell remains the serving cell and may be activated/deactivated. This option assumes the case, for example, where the roles of SpCell#0 and Scell#1 are swapped, with SpCell#0 becoming the Scell and Scell#1 becoming the new SpCell.
《オプション3》
 元のサービングセルは、タイプCセルやタイプBセルになってもよい。
Option 3
The original serving cell may become a type C cell or a type B cell.
《オプション4》
 UEは、セルの役割変更の有無を示す特定の信号も受信してもよい。特定の信号は、セルスイッチコマンド/セル状態指示と同じ信号であってもよいし、または別信号であってもよい。特定の信号は、元のサービングセル(ソースセル)の役割変更の有無(例えば、候補セルへ変更するかどうか、タイプCセルへ変更するかどうか)のみを指示してもよい。例えば、特定の指示は、複数/全セルの役割変化指示を示してもよい。
Option 4:
The UE may also receive a specific signal indicating whether or not a cell role is changed. The specific signal may be the same as the cell switch command/cell status indication, or may be a different signal. The specific signal may indicate only whether or not the original serving cell (source cell) role is changed (e.g., whether or not to change to a candidate cell, whether or not to change to a type-C cell). For example, the specific indication may indicate a role change indication for multiple/all cells.
《オプション5》
 元のサービングセルは、ターゲットセルのタイプに依存して、役割変更などが行われてもよい。UEは、例えば、ターゲットセルがタイプBかタイプCである場合に、元のサービングセルとターゲットセルと役割を交換してもよい。例えば、UEは、ターゲットセルがタイプAかタイプDである場合に、元のサービングセルとターゲットセルとの役割を交換しなくてもよい。
Option 5:
The original serving cell may undergo role changes, etc., depending on the type of the target cell. For example, the UE may exchange roles with the original serving cell and the target cell when the target cell is type B or type C. For example, the UE may not exchange roles with the original serving cell and the target cell when the target cell is type A or type D.
<実施形態3>
 セルグループ内のサービングセルと候補セルについて、RRCによって設定されたセル/PCIに対応する特定のインデックスが指示されてもよい。特定のインデックスは、例えば、PCIの一部と関連するインデックスである。特定のインデックスは、RRCによりPCIセルと再設定インデックスとの関連が設定される。特定のインデックスは、PCIよりもビット数が削減されるため、セルに対する、MAC CE/DCIにおけるビットマップ等を用いた指示を容易にすることができる。セルスイッチ後、特定のインデックスが更新されるかどうかについて、以下のいずれかのオプションが適用されてもよい。
<Embodiment 3>
For the serving cell and the candidate cells in the cell group, a specific index corresponding to the cell/PCI configured by the RRC may be indicated. The specific index is, for example, an index associated with a part of the PCI. The specific index is configured by the RRC to associate the PCI cell with a reconfiguration index. The specific index has a reduced number of bits compared to the PCI, and therefore can facilitate indication of the cell using a bitmap in the MAC CE/DCI, etc. After a cell switch, one of the following options may be applied regarding whether the specific index is updated:
《オプション1》
 UEは、RRC再構成信号を受信しない場合(新たなRRC再構成が行われるまでの間)、特定のインデックスを保持してもよい。例えば、特定のインデックス「0」が、現在のSpCell用であってもよいし、現在のSpCell用でなくてもよい。
Option 1
If the UE does not receive an RRC reconfiguration signal (until a new RRC reconfiguration occurs), the UE may retain the specific index, for example, a specific index "0" may or may not be for the current SpCell.
《オプション2》
 SpCellスイッチの場合のみ、UEは、元のSpCellとターゲットセルの特定のインデックスを交換してもよい。例えば、特定のインデックス「0」が、常にSpCell用に設定されてもよい。
Option 2
Only in the case of SpCell switch, the UE may exchange the specific indexes of the original SpCell and the target cell, for example, the specific index "0" may be always set for the SpCell.
《オプション3》
 セルスイッチが発生した場合、UEは、サービングセルとターゲットセルの特定のインデックスを交換してもよい。この場合、常に、サービングセルのインデックスが候補セルのインデックスより小さく(低く)てもよい。
Option 3
When a cell switch occurs, the UE may exchange the specific indexes of the serving cell and the target cell, where the index of the serving cell may always be smaller (lower) than the index of the candidate cell.
《オプション4》
 セルスイッチコマンドは、一部/すべてのサービングセル/候補セルの特定のインデックスを示してもよい。特定のインデックスの指示は、セルスイッチコマンドと同じ信号に含まれてもよいし、別の信号(例えば、MAC CE/DCIによる)に含まれてもよい。UEは、オプション4の機能をサポートすることを示すUE能力情報を送信してもよい。
Option 4:
The cell switch command may indicate specific indices of some/all serving/candidate cells. The indication of the specific indices may be included in the same signal as the cell switch command or in a separate signal (e.g., via MAC CE/DCI). The UE may send UE capability information indicating that it supports the Option 4 feature.
<グループスイッチのケース>
 各実施形態は、セルグループスイッチのケース(例えば、図9)にも適用可能されてもよい。
<Group switch case>
Each embodiment may also be applicable to the cell group switch case (eg, FIG. 9).
 実施形態2.1および2.2をセルグループスイッチに適用してもよい。UEが、セルグループスイッチコマンドをL1/L2シグナリングにより受信する場合、以下の処理が行われてもよい。
・ターゲットセルグループがアクティブ化される。
・元の(変更前の)サービングセルグループは、非アクティブ化されてもよいし、アクティブ化のままであってもよいし、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化のステータスを新しいシグナリングで明示的にUEに示されてもよい。
・他の候補セルグループは、非アクティブ化されてもよいし、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化が変更なしであってもよいし、アクティブ化/非アクティブ化のステータスを新しいシグナリングで明示的にUEに示されてもよい。
・セルグループのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化は、セルグループ指示(スイッチ指示)と同じ信号でも、別の新しい信号(MAC CE/DCI)でもよい。
The embodiments 2.1 and 2.2 may be applied to the cell group switch. When the UE receives a cell group switch command through L1/L2 signaling, the following process may be performed.
The target cell group is activated.
The original (pre-change) serving cell group may be deactivated, may remain activated, or the activation/deactivation status may be explicitly indicated to the UE in new signaling.
Other candidate cell groups may be deactivated, their activation/deactivation may remain unchanged, or their activation/deactivation status may be explicitly indicated to the UE in new signaling.
Cell group activation/deactivation can be the same signal as cell group indication (switch indication) or a separate new signal (MAC CE/DCI).
 UEは、各セルグループ(または特定のセルグループ、例えばターゲットセルグループ)のSpCell/Scellの役割の変更が指示されてもよい。UEは、セルグループのアクティブ化/非アクティブ化の更新に関するUE能力情報を送信してもよい。 The UE may be instructed to change the SpCell/Scell role for each cell group (or for a specific cell group, e.g., the target cell group). The UE may send UE capability information regarding cell group activation/deactivation updates.
 実施形態3をセルグループスイッチに適用してもよい。例えば、特定のインデックスは、特定のセルグループインデックスに読み替えられ、PCIは、セルグループインデックス(オリジナルのセルグループインデックス)に読み替えられてもよい。サービングセルグループと候補セルグループのセルグループインデックスは、保持されてもよいし、スイッチ(ターゲットセルグループと元のサービングセルグループの間のスイッチ)されてもよいし、新しいシグナリングによりUEに明示的に指示されてもよい。UEは、セルグループインデックスの更新に関するUE能力情報を送信してもよい。 Embodiment 3 may be applied to a cell group switch. For example, a specific index may be replaced with a specific cell group index, and a PCI may be replaced with a cell group index (original cell group index). The cell group indexes of the serving cell group and the candidate cell group may be retained, switched (switch between the target cell group and the original serving cell group), or explicitly indicated to the UE by new signaling. The UE may transmit UE capability information regarding the update of the cell group index.
<補足>
[UEへの情報の通知]
 上述の実施形態における(ネットワーク(Network(NW))(例えば、基地局(Base Station(BS)))から)UEへの任意の情報の通知(言い換えると、UEにおけるBSからの任意の情報の受信)は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、DCI)、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、RRCシグナリング、MAC CE)、特定の信号/チャネル(例えば、PDCCH、PDSCH、参照信号)、又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて行われてもよい。
<Additional Information>
[Notification of information to UE]
In the above-described embodiments, any information may be notified to the UE (from a network (NW) (e.g., a base station (BS))) (in other words, any information is received by the UE from the BS) using physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, PDSCH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.
 上記通知がMAC CEによって行われる場合、当該MAC CEは、既存の規格では規定されていない新たな論理チャネルID(Logical Channel ID(LCID))がMACサブヘッダに含まれることによって識別されてもよい。 When the above notification is performed by a MAC CE, the MAC CE may be identified by including a new Logical Channel ID (LCID) in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
 上記通知がDCIによって行われる場合、上記通知は、当該DCIの特定のフィールド、当該DCIに付与される巡回冗長検査(Cyclic Redundancy Check(CRC))ビットのスクランブルに用いられる無線ネットワーク一時識別子(Radio Network Temporary Identifier(RNTI))、当該DCIのフォーマットなどによって行われてもよい。 When the notification is made by a DCI, the notification may be made by a specific field of the DCI, a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) used to scramble Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) bits assigned to the DCI, the format of the DCI, etc.
 また、上述の実施形態におけるUEへの任意の情報の通知は、周期的、セミパーシステント又は非周期的に行われてもよい。 Furthermore, notification of any information to the UE in the above-mentioned embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
[UEからの情報の通知]
 上述の実施形態におけるUEから(NWへ)の任意の情報の通知(言い換えると、UEにおけるBSへの任意の情報の送信/報告)は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、UCI)、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、RRCシグナリング、MAC CE)、特定の信号/チャネル(例えば、PUCCH、PUSCH、PRACH、参照信号)、又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて行われてもよい。
[Information notification from UE]
In the above-described embodiments, notification of any information from the UE (to the NW) (in other words, transmission/report of any information from the UE to the BS) may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., UCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.
 上記通知がMAC CEによって行われる場合、当該MAC CEは、既存の規格では規定されていない新たなLCIDがMACサブヘッダに含まれることによって識別されてもよい。 If the notification is made by a MAC CE, the MAC CE may be identified by including a new LCID in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
 上記通知がUCIによって行われる場合、上記通知は、PUCCH又はPUSCHを用いて送信されてもよい。 If the notification is made by UCI, the notification may be transmitted using PUCCH or PUSCH.
 また、上述の実施形態におけるUEからの任意の情報の通知は、周期的、セミパーシステント又は非周期的に行われてもよい。 Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiments, notification of any information from the UE may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
[各実施形態の適用について]
 上述の実施形態の少なくとも1つは、特定の条件を満たす場合に適用されてもよい。当該特定の条件は、規格において規定されてもよいし、上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングを用いてUE/BSに通知されてもよい。
[Application of each embodiment]
At least one of the above-mentioned embodiments may be applied when a specific condition is satisfied, which may be specified in a standard or may be notified to a UE/BS using higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling.
 上述の実施形態の少なくとも1つは、特定のUE能力(UE capability)を報告した又は当該特定のUE能力をサポートするUEに対してのみ適用されてもよい。 At least one of the above-described embodiments may be applied only to UEs that have reported or support a particular UE capability.
 当該特定のUE能力は、上記実施形態の少なくとも1つについての特定の処理/動作/制御/情報をサポートすることを示してもよい。 The particular UE capability may indicate support for particular processing/operations/control/information for at least one of the above embodiments.
 また、上記特定のUE能力は、全周波数にわたって(周波数に関わらず共通に)適用される能力であってもよいし、周波数(例えば、セル、バンド、バンドコンビネーション、BWP、コンポーネントキャリアなどの1つ又はこれらの組み合わせ)ごとの能力であってもよいし、周波数レンジ(例えば、Frequency Range 1(FR1)、FR2、FR3、FR4、FR5、FR2-1、FR2-2)ごとの能力であってもよいし、サブキャリア間隔(SubCarrier Spacing(SCS))ごとの能力であってもよいし、Feature Set(FS)又はFeature Set Per Component-carrier(FSPC)ごとの能力であってもよい。 Furthermore, the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all frequencies (commonly regardless of frequency), capabilities per frequency (e.g., one or a combination of a cell, band, band combination, BWP, component carrier, etc.), capabilities per frequency range (e.g., Frequency Range 1 (FR1), FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2), capabilities per subcarrier spacing (SubCarrier Spacing (SCS)), or capabilities per Feature Set (FS) or Feature Set Per Component-carrier (FSPC).
 また、上記特定のUE能力は、全複信方式にわたって(複信方式に関わらず共通に)適用される能力であってもよいし、複信方式(例えば、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))、周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD)))ごとの能力であってもよい。 The specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all duplexing methods (commonly regardless of the duplexing method), or may be capabilities for each duplexing method (e.g., Time Division Duplex (TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)).
 また、上述の実施形態の少なくとも1つは、UEが上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングによって、上述の実施形態に関連する特定の情報(又は上述の実施形態の動作を実施すること)を設定/アクティベート/トリガされた場合に適用されてもよい。例えば、当該特定の情報は、特定のリリース(例えば、Rel.18/19)向けの任意のRRCパラメータなどであってもよい。 Furthermore, at least one of the above-mentioned embodiments may be applied when the UE configures/activates/triggers specific information related to the above-mentioned embodiments (or performs the operations of the above-mentioned embodiments) by higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling. For example, the specific information may be any RRC parameters for a specific release (e.g., Rel. 18/19), etc.
 UEは、上記特定のUE能力の少なくとも1つをサポートしない又は上記特定の情報を設定されない場合、例えばRel.15/16の動作を適用してもよい。 If the UE does not support at least one of the above specific UE capabilities or the above specific information is not configured, the UE may, for example, apply Rel. 15/16 operations.
(付記)
 本開示の一実施形態に関して、以下の発明を付記する。
[付記1]
 サービングセルがレイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)セル間モビリティの候補セルとなり得るかどうかを示す設定を受信する受信部と、
 前記設定に基づいて、前記サービングセルのスイッチを制御する制御部と、
 を有する端末。
[付記2]
 前記設定は、セルグループ毎の、セルグループ内の全ての前記サービングセルがL1/L2セル間モビリティの前記候補セルとなり得るかどうかを示す設定である
 付記1に記載の端末。
[付記3]
 前記設定は、セルグループ内の各サービングセルがL1/L2セル間モビリティの前記候補セルとなり得るかどうかを示す設定である
 付記1に記載の端末。
[付記4]
 前記サービングセルのスイッチは、前記候補セルとなる前記サービングセルがスペシャルセル(SpCell)またはセカンダリセル(SCell)にスイッチされることである
 付記1から付記3のいずれかに記載の端末。
(Additional Note)
With respect to one embodiment of the present disclosure, the following invention is noted.
[Appendix 1]
a receiving unit for receiving a configuration indicating whether a serving cell can be a candidate cell for Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) inter-cell mobility;
A control unit that controls a switch of the serving cell based on the setting;
A terminal having the above configuration.
[Appendix 2]
The terminal according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the setting is a setting for each cell group indicating whether all the serving cells in the cell group can be the candidate cells for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
[Appendix 3]
The terminal according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the setting indicates whether each serving cell in a cell group can be the candidate cell for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
[Appendix 4]
The terminal according to any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the switch of the serving cell is a switch of the serving cell that is the candidate cell to a special cell (SpCell) or a secondary cell (SCell).
 本開示の一実施形態に関して、さらに、以下の発明を付記する。
[付記1]
 レイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)シグナリングによりスペシャルセル(SpCell)のセルスイッチコマンドを受信する受信部と、
 候補セルのタイプに基づいて、当該候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスについて異なる想定を行う制御部と、
 を有する端末。
[付記2]
 前記制御部は、前記候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスが変更されないと想定する
 付記1に記載の端末。
[付記3]
 前記受信部は、前記候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化の指示を受信する
 付記1又は付記2に記載の端末。
[付記4]
 前記受信部は、セルグループ内のサービングセルと候補セルについて、物理セルインデックス(PCI)の一部と関連するインデックスを受信する
 付記1から付記3のいずれかに記載の端末。
The following inventions are further described with respect to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
[Appendix 1]
a receiving unit for receiving a cell switch command of a special cell (SpCell) by Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling;
A control unit that makes different assumptions about the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell;
A terminal having the above configuration.
[Appendix 2]
The terminal according to claim 1, wherein the control unit assumes that an activation or deactivation status of the candidate cell is not changed.
[Appendix 3]
The terminal according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the receiving unit receives an instruction to activate or deactivate the candidate cell.
[Appendix 4]
The terminal according to any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the receiving unit receives an index associated with a part of a physical cell index (PCI) for a serving cell and a candidate cell in a cell group.
(無線通信システム)
 以下、本開示の一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの構成について説明する。この無線通信システムでは、本開示の上記各実施形態に係る無線通信方法のいずれか又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて通信が行われる。
(Wireless communication system)
A configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described below. In this wireless communication system, communication is performed using any one of the wireless communication methods according to the above embodiments of the present disclosure or a combination of these.
 図13は、一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの概略構成の一例を示す図である。無線通信システム1(単にシステム1と呼ばれてもよい)は、Third Generation Partnership Project(3GPP)によって仕様化されるLong Term Evolution(LTE)、5th generation mobile communication system New Radio(5G NR)などを用いて通信を実現するシステムであってもよい。 FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment. The wireless communication system 1 (which may simply be referred to as system 1) may be a system that realizes communication using Long Term Evolution (LTE) specified by the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio (5G NR), or the like.
 また、無線通信システム1は、複数のRadio Access Technology(RAT)間のデュアルコネクティビティ(マルチRATデュアルコネクティビティ(Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity(MR-DC)))をサポートしてもよい。MR-DCは、LTE(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access(E-UTRA))とNRとのデュアルコネクティビティ(E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity(EN-DC))、NRとLTEとのデュアルコネクティビティ(NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity(NE-DC))などを含んでもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may also support dual connectivity between multiple Radio Access Technologies (RATs) (Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC)). MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
 EN-DCでは、LTE(E-UTRA)の基地局(eNB)がマスタノード(Master Node(MN))であり、NRの基地局(gNB)がセカンダリノード(Secondary Node(SN))である。NE-DCでは、NRの基地局(gNB)がMNであり、LTE(E-UTRA)の基地局(eNB)がSNである。 In EN-DC, the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the master node (MN), and the NR base station (gNB) is the secondary node (SN). In NE-DC, the NR base station (gNB) is the MN, and the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the SN.
 無線通信システム1は、同一のRAT内の複数の基地局間のデュアルコネクティビティ(例えば、MN及びSNの双方がNRの基地局(gNB)であるデュアルコネクティビティ(NR-NR Dual Connectivity(NN-DC)))をサポートしてもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may support dual connectivity between multiple base stations within the same RAT (e.g., dual connectivity in which both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
 無線通信システム1は、比較的カバレッジの広いマクロセルC1を形成する基地局11と、マクロセルC1内に配置され、マクロセルC1よりも狭いスモールセルC2を形成する基地局12(12a-12c)と、を備えてもよい。ユーザ端末20は、少なくとも1つのセル内に位置してもよい。各セル及びユーザ端末20の配置、数などは、図に示す態様に限定されない。以下、基地局11及び12を区別しない場合は、基地局10と総称する。 The wireless communication system 1 may include a base station 11 that forms a macrocell C1 with a relatively wide coverage, and base stations 12 (12a-12c) that are arranged within the macrocell C1 and form a small cell C2 that is narrower than the macrocell C1. A user terminal 20 may be located within at least one of the cells. The arrangement and number of each cell and user terminal 20 are not limited to the embodiment shown in the figure. Hereinafter, when there is no need to distinguish between the base stations 11 and 12, they will be collectively referred to as base station 10.
 ユーザ端末20は、複数の基地局10のうち、少なくとも1つに接続してもよい。ユーザ端末20は、複数のコンポーネントキャリア(Component Carrier(CC))を用いたキャリアアグリゲーション(Carrier Aggregation(CA))及びデュアルコネクティビティ(DC)の少なくとも一方を利用してもよい。 The user terminal 20 may be connected to at least one of the multiple base stations 10. The user terminal 20 may utilize at least one of carrier aggregation (CA) using multiple component carriers (CC) and dual connectivity (DC).
 各CCは、第1の周波数帯(Frequency Range 1(FR1))及び第2の周波数帯(Frequency Range 2(FR2))の少なくとも1つに含まれてもよい。マクロセルC1はFR1に含まれてもよいし、スモールセルC2はFR2に含まれてもよい。例えば、FR1は、6GHz以下の周波数帯(サブ6GHz(sub-6GHz))であってもよいし、FR2は、24GHzよりも高い周波数帯(above-24GHz)であってもよい。なお、FR1及びFR2の周波数帯、定義などはこれらに限られず、例えばFR1がFR2よりも高い周波数帯に該当してもよい。 Each CC may be included in at least one of a first frequency band (Frequency Range 1 (FR1)) and a second frequency band (Frequency Range 2 (FR2)). Macro cell C1 may be included in FR1, and small cell C2 may be included in FR2. For example, FR1 may be a frequency band below 6 GHz (sub-6 GHz), and FR2 may be a frequency band above 24 GHz (above-24 GHz). Note that the frequency bands and definitions of FR1 and FR2 are not limited to these, and for example, FR1 may correspond to a higher frequency band than FR2.
 また、ユーザ端末20は、各CCにおいて、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))及び周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD))の少なくとも1つを用いて通信を行ってもよい。 In addition, the user terminal 20 may communicate using at least one of Time Division Duplex (TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) in each CC.
 複数の基地局10は、有線(例えば、Common Public Radio Interface(CPRI)に準拠した光ファイバ、X2インターフェースなど)又は無線(例えば、NR通信)によって接続されてもよい。例えば、基地局11及び12間においてNR通信がバックホールとして利用される場合、上位局に該当する基地局11はIntegrated Access Backhaul(IAB)ドナー、中継局(リレー)に該当する基地局12はIABノードと呼ばれてもよい。 The multiple base stations 10 may be connected by wire (e.g., optical fiber conforming to the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2 interface, etc.) or wirelessly (e.g., NR communication). For example, when NR communication is used as a backhaul between base stations 11 and 12, base station 11, which corresponds to the upper station, may be called an Integrated Access Backhaul (IAB) donor, and base station 12, which corresponds to a relay station, may be called an IAB node.
 基地局10は、他の基地局10を介して、又は直接コアネットワーク30に接続されてもよい。コアネットワーク30は、例えば、Evolved Packet Core(EPC)、5G Core Network(5GCN)、Next Generation Core(NGC)などの少なくとも1つを含んでもよい。 The base station 10 may be connected to the core network 30 directly or via another base station 10. The core network 30 may include at least one of, for example, an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a 5G Core Network (5GCN), a Next Generation Core (NGC), etc.
 コアネットワーク30は、例えば、User Plane Function(UPF)、Access and Mobility management Function(AMF)、Session Management Function(SMF)、Unified Data Management(UDM)、Application Function(AF)、Data Network(DN)、Location Management Function(LMF)、保守運用管理(Operation、Administration and Maintenance(Management)(OAM))などのネットワーク機能(Network Functions(NF))を含んでもよい。なお、1つのネットワークノードによって複数の機能が提供されてもよい。また、DNを介して外部ネットワーク(例えば、インターネット)との通信が行われてもよい。 The core network 30 may include network functions (Network Functions (NF)) such as, for example, a User Plane Function (UPF), an Access and Mobility management Function (AMF), a Session Management Function (SMF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), a Data Network (DN), a Location Management Function (LMF), and Operation, Administration and Maintenance (Management) (OAM). Note that multiple functions may be provided by one network node. In addition, communication with an external network (e.g., the Internet) may be performed via the DN.
 ユーザ端末20は、LTE、LTE-A、5Gなどの通信方式の少なくとも1つに対応した端末であってもよい。 The user terminal 20 may be a terminal that supports at least one of the communication methods such as LTE, LTE-A, and 5G.
 無線通信システム1においては、直交周波数分割多重(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM))ベースの無線アクセス方式が利用されてもよい。例えば、下りリンク(Downlink(DL))及び上りリンク(Uplink(UL))の少なくとも一方において、Cyclic Prefix OFDM(CP-OFDM)、Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM(DFT-s-OFDM)、Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access(OFDMA)、Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access(SC-FDMA)などが利用されてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a wireless access method based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) may be used. For example, in at least one of the downlink (DL) and uplink (UL), Cyclic Prefix OFDM (CP-OFDM), Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM (DFT-s-OFDM), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA), etc. may be used.
 無線アクセス方式は、波形(waveform)と呼ばれてもよい。なお、無線通信システム1においては、UL及びDLの無線アクセス方式には、他の無線アクセス方式(例えば、他のシングルキャリア伝送方式、他のマルチキャリア伝送方式)が用いられてもよい。 The radio access method may also be called a waveform. In the wireless communication system 1, other radio access methods (e.g., other single-carrier transmission methods, other multi-carrier transmission methods) may be used for the UL and DL radio access methods.
 無線通信システム1では、下りリンクチャネルとして、各ユーザ端末20で共有される下り共有チャネル(Physical Downlink Shared Channel(PDSCH))、ブロードキャストチャネル(Physical Broadcast Channel(PBCH))、下り制御チャネル(Physical Downlink Control Channel(PDCCH))などが用いられてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, a broadcast channel (Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), etc. may be used as the downlink channel.
 また、無線通信システム1では、上りリンクチャネルとして、各ユーザ端末20で共有される上り共有チャネル(Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH))、上り制御チャネル(Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH))、ランダムアクセスチャネル(Physical Random Access Channel(PRACH))などが用いられてもよい。 In addition, in the wireless communication system 1, an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)), a random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)), etc. may be used as an uplink channel.
 PDSCHによって、ユーザデータ、上位レイヤ制御情報、System Information Block(SIB)などが伝送される。PUSCHによって、ユーザデータ、上位レイヤ制御情報などが伝送されてもよい。また、PBCHによって、Master Information Block(MIB)が伝送されてもよい。 User data, upper layer control information, System Information Block (SIB), etc. are transmitted via PDSCH. User data, upper layer control information, etc. may also be transmitted via PUSCH. Furthermore, Master Information Block (MIB) may also be transmitted via PBCH.
 PDCCHによって、下位レイヤ制御情報が伝送されてもよい。下位レイヤ制御情報は、例えば、PDSCH及びPUSCHの少なくとも一方のスケジューリング情報を含む下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))を含んでもよい。 Lower layer control information may be transmitted by the PDCCH. The lower layer control information may include, for example, downlink control information (Downlink Control Information (DCI)) including scheduling information for at least one of the PDSCH and the PUSCH.
 なお、PDSCHをスケジューリングするDCIは、DLアサインメント、DL DCIなどと呼ばれてもよいし、PUSCHをスケジューリングするDCIは、ULグラント、UL DCIなどと呼ばれてもよい。なお、PDSCHはDLデータで読み替えられてもよいし、PUSCHはULデータで読み替えられてもよい。 Note that the DCI for scheduling the PDSCH may be called a DL assignment or DL DCI, and the DCI for scheduling the PUSCH may be called a UL grant or UL DCI. Note that the PDSCH may be interpreted as DL data, and the PUSCH may be interpreted as UL data.
 PDCCHの検出には、制御リソースセット(COntrol REsource SET(CORESET))及びサーチスペース(search space)が利用されてもよい。CORESETは、DCIをサーチするリソースに対応する。サーチスペースは、PDCCH候補(PDCCH candidates)のサーチ領域及びサーチ方法に対応する。1つのCORESETは、1つ又は複数のサーチスペースに関連付けられてもよい。UEは、サーチスペース設定に基づいて、あるサーチスペースに関連するCORESETをモニタしてもよい。 A control resource set (COntrol REsource SET (CORESET)) and a search space may be used to detect the PDCCH. The CORESET corresponds to the resources to search for DCI. The search space corresponds to the search region and search method of PDCCH candidates. One CORESET may be associated with one or multiple search spaces. The UE may monitor the CORESET associated with a search space based on the search space configuration.
 1つのサーチスペースは、1つ又は複数のアグリゲーションレベル(aggregation Level)に該当するPDCCH候補に対応してもよい。1つ又は複数のサーチスペースは、サーチスペースセットと呼ばれてもよい。なお、本開示の「サーチスペース」、「サーチスペースセット」、「サーチスペース設定」、「サーチスペースセット設定」、「CORESET」、「CORESET設定」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 A search space may correspond to PDCCH candidates corresponding to one or more aggregation levels. One or more search spaces may be referred to as a search space set. Note that the terms "search space," "search space set," "search space setting," "search space set setting," "CORESET," "CORESET setting," etc. in this disclosure may be read as interchangeable.
 PUCCHによって、チャネル状態情報(Channel State Information(CSI))、送達確認情報(例えば、Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement(HARQ-ACK)、ACK/NACKなどと呼ばれてもよい)及びスケジューリングリクエスト(Scheduling Request(SR))の少なくとも1つを含む上り制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI))が伝送されてもよい。PRACHによって、セルとの接続確立のためのランダムアクセスプリアンブルが伝送されてもよい。 The PUCCH may transmit uplink control information (UCI) including at least one of channel state information (CSI), delivery confirmation information (which may be called, for example, Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK), ACK/NACK, etc.), and a scheduling request (SR). The PRACH may transmit a random access preamble for establishing a connection with a cell.
 なお、本開示において下りリンク、上りリンクなどは「リンク」を付けずに表現されてもよい。また、各種チャネルの先頭に「物理(Physical)」を付けずに表現されてもよい。 Note that in this disclosure, downlink, uplink, etc. may be expressed without adding "link." Also, various channels may be expressed without adding "Physical" to the beginning.
 無線通信システム1では、同期信号(Synchronization Signal(SS))、下りリンク参照信号(Downlink Reference Signal(DL-RS))などが伝送されてもよい。無線通信システム1では、DL-RSとして、セル固有参照信号(Cell-specific Reference Signal(CRS))、チャネル状態情報参照信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal(CSI-RS))、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))、位置決定参照信号(Positioning Reference Signal(PRS))、位相トラッキング参照信号(Phase Tracking Reference Signal(PTRS))などが伝送されてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a synchronization signal (SS), a downlink reference signal (DL-RS), etc. may be transmitted. In the wireless communication system 1, as the DL-RS, a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), a positioning reference signal (PRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), etc. may be transmitted.
 同期信号は、例えば、プライマリ同期信号(Primary Synchronization Signal(PSS))及びセカンダリ同期信号(Secondary Synchronization Signal(SSS))の少なくとも1つであってもよい。SS(PSS、SSS)及びPBCH(及びPBCH用のDMRS)を含む信号ブロックは、SS/PBCHブロック、SS Block(SSB)などと呼ばれてもよい。なお、SS、SSBなども、参照信号と呼ばれてもよい。 The synchronization signal may be, for example, at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) and a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS). A signal block including an SS (PSS, SSS) and a PBCH (and a DMRS for PBCH) may be called an SS/PBCH block, an SS Block (SSB), etc. In addition, the SS, SSB, etc. may also be called a reference signal.
 また、無線通信システム1では、上りリンク参照信号(Uplink Reference Signal(UL-RS))として、測定用参照信号(Sounding Reference Signal(SRS))、復調用参照信号(DMRS)などが伝送されてもよい。なお、DMRSはユーザ端末固有参照信号(UE-specific Reference Signal)と呼ばれてもよい。 In addition, in the wireless communication system 1, a measurement reference signal (Sounding Reference Signal (SRS)), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc. may be transmitted as an uplink reference signal (UL-RS). Note that the DMRS may also be called a user equipment-specific reference signal (UE-specific Reference Signal).
(基地局)
 図14は、一実施形態に係る基地局の構成の一例を示す図である。基地局10は、制御部110、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース(transmission line interface)140を備えている。なお、制御部110、送受信部120及び送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140は、それぞれ1つ以上が備えられてもよい。
(base station)
14 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a base station according to an embodiment. The base station 10 includes a control unit 110, a transceiver unit 120, a transceiver antenna 130, and a transmission line interface 140. Note that one or more of each of the control unit 110, the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission line interface 140 may be provided.
 なお、本例では、本実施の形態における特徴部分の機能ブロックを主に示しており、基地局10は、無線通信に必要な他の機能ブロックも有すると想定されてもよい。以下で説明する各部の処理の一部は、省略されてもよい。 Note that this example mainly shows the functional blocks of the characteristic parts of this embodiment, and the base station 10 may also be assumed to have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each part described below may be omitted.
 制御部110は、基地局10全体の制御を実施する。制御部110は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるコントローラ、制御回路などから構成することができる。 The control unit 110 controls the entire base station 10. The control unit 110 can be configured from a controller, a control circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
 制御部110は、信号の生成、スケジューリング(例えば、リソース割り当て、マッピング)などを制御してもよい。制御部110は、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140を用いた送受信、測定などを制御してもよい。制御部110は、信号として送信するデータ、制御情報、系列(sequence)などを生成し、送受信部120に転送してもよい。制御部110は、通信チャネルの呼処理(設定、解放など)、基地局10の状態管理、無線リソースの管理などを行ってもよい。 The control unit 110 may control signal generation, scheduling (e.g., resource allocation, mapping), etc. The control unit 110 may control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140, measurement, etc. The control unit 110 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 120. The control unit 110 may perform call processing of communication channels (setting, release, etc.), status management of the base station 10, management of radio resources, etc.
 送受信部120は、ベースバンド(baseband)部121、Radio Frequency(RF)部122、測定部123を含んでもよい。ベースバンド部121は、送信処理部1211及び受信処理部1212を含んでもよい。送受信部120は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるトランスミッター/レシーバー、RF回路、ベースバンド回路、フィルタ、位相シフタ(phase shifter)、測定回路、送受信回路などから構成することができる。 The transceiver unit 120 may include a baseband unit 121, a radio frequency (RF) unit 122, and a measurement unit 123. The baseband unit 121 may include a transmission processing unit 1211 and a reception processing unit 1212. The transceiver unit 120 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which the present disclosure relates.
 送受信部120は、一体の送受信部として構成されてもよいし、送信部及び受信部から構成されてもよい。当該送信部は、送信処理部1211、RF部122から構成されてもよい。当該受信部は、受信処理部1212、RF部122、測定部123から構成されてもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmission unit and a reception unit. The transmission unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 1211 and an RF unit 122. The reception unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 1212, an RF unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
 送受信アンテナ130は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるアンテナ、例えばアレイアンテナなどから構成することができる。 The transmitting/receiving antenna 130 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
 送受信部120は、上述の下りリンクチャネル、同期信号、下りリンク参照信号などを送信してもよい。送受信部120は、上述の上りリンクチャネル、上りリンク参照信号などを受信してもよい。 The transceiver 120 may transmit the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc. The transceiver 120 may receive the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
 送受信部120は、デジタルビームフォーミング(例えば、プリコーディング)、アナログビームフォーミング(例えば、位相回転)などを用いて、送信ビーム及び受信ビームの少なくとも一方を形成してもよい。 The transceiver 120 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
 送受信部120(送信処理部1211)は、例えば制御部110から取得したデータ、制御情報などに対して、Packet Data Convergence Protocol(PDCP)レイヤの処理、Radio Link Control(RLC)レイヤの処理(例えば、RLC再送制御)、Medium Access Control(MAC)レイヤの処理(例えば、HARQ再送制御)などを行い、送信するビット列を生成してもよい。 The transceiver 120 (transmission processing unit 1211) may perform Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer processing, Radio Link Control (RLC) layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), Medium Access Control (MAC) layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc., on data and control information obtained from the control unit 110, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
 送受信部120(送信処理部1211)は、送信するビット列に対して、チャネル符号化(誤り訂正符号化を含んでもよい)、変調、マッピング、フィルタ処理、離散フーリエ変換(Discrete Fourier Transform(DFT))処理(必要に応じて)、逆高速フーリエ変換(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform(IFFT))処理、プリコーディング、デジタル-アナログ変換などの送信処理を行い、ベースバンド信号を出力してもよい。 The transceiver 120 (transmission processor 1211) may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
 送受信部120(RF部122)は、ベースバンド信号に対して、無線周波数帯への変調、フィルタ処理、増幅などを行い、無線周波数帯の信号を、送受信アンテナ130を介して送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 (RF unit 122) may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc., on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 130.
 一方、送受信部120(RF部122)は、送受信アンテナ130によって受信された無線周波数帯の信号に対して、増幅、フィルタ処理、ベースバンド信号への復調などを行ってもよい。 On the other hand, the transceiver unit 120 (RF unit 122) may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 130.
 送受信部120(受信処理部1212)は、取得されたベースバンド信号に対して、アナログ-デジタル変換、高速フーリエ変換(Fast Fourier Transform(FFT))処理、逆離散フーリエ変換(Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform(IDFT))処理(必要に応じて)、フィルタ処理、デマッピング、復調、復号(誤り訂正復号を含んでもよい)、MACレイヤ処理、RLCレイヤの処理及びPDCPレイヤの処理などの受信処理を適用し、ユーザデータなどを取得してもよい。 The transceiver 120 (reception processing unit 1212) may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, and acquire user data, etc.
 送受信部120(測定部123)は、受信した信号に関する測定を実施してもよい。例えば、測定部123は、受信した信号に基づいて、Radio Resource Management(RRM)測定、Channel State Information(CSI)測定などを行ってもよい。測定部123は、受信電力(例えば、Reference Signal Received Power(RSRP))、受信品質(例えば、Reference Signal Received Quality(RSRQ)、Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio(SINR)、Signal to Noise Ratio(SNR))、信号強度(例えば、Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI))、伝搬路情報(例えば、CSI)などについて測定してもよい。測定結果は、制御部110に出力されてもよい。 The transceiver 120 (measurement unit 123) may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 123 may perform Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurements, Channel State Information (CSI) measurements, etc. based on the received signal. The measurement unit 123 may measure received power (e.g., Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)), received quality (e.g., Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)), signal strength (e.g., Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc. The measurement results may be output to the control unit 110.
 伝送路インターフェース140は、コアネットワーク30に含まれる装置(例えば、NFを提供するネットワークノード)、他の基地局10などとの間で信号を送受信(バックホールシグナリング)し、ユーザ端末20のためのユーザデータ(ユーザプレーンデータ)、制御プレーンデータなどを取得、伝送などしてもよい。 The transmission path interface 140 may transmit and receive signals (backhaul signaling) between devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes providing NF), other base stations 10, etc., and may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
 なお、本開示における基地局10の送信部及び受信部は、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。 In addition, the transmitting unit and receiving unit of the base station 10 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitting/receiving unit 120, the transmitting/receiving antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140.
 なお、送受信部120は、サービングセルがレイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)セル間モビリティの候補セルとなり得るかどうかを示す設定を送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 may also transmit a setting indicating whether the serving cell can be a candidate cell for Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) inter-cell mobility.
 制御部110は、前記設定に基づいて、前記サービングセルのスイッチを制御してもよい。 The control unit 110 may control the switch of the serving cell based on the setting.
 送受信部120は、レイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)シグナリングによりスペシャルセル(SpCell)のセルスイッチコマンドを送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 may transmit a cell switch command for a special cell (SpCell) via Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling.
 制御部110は、候補セルのタイプに基づいて、当該候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスについて異なる制御を行ってもよい。 The control unit 110 may perform different control over the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell.
(ユーザ端末)
 図15は、一実施形態に係るユーザ端末の構成の一例を示す図である。ユーザ端末20は、制御部210、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230を備えている。なお、制御部210、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230は、それぞれ1つ以上が備えられてもよい。
(User terminal)
15 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment. The user terminal 20 includes a control unit 210, a transceiver unit 220, and a transceiver antenna 230. Note that the control unit 210, the transceiver unit 220, and the transceiver antenna 230 may each include one or more.
 なお、本例では、本実施の形態における特徴部分の機能ブロックを主に示しており、ユーザ端末20は、無線通信に必要な他の機能ブロックも有すると想定されてもよい。以下で説明する各部の処理の一部は、省略されてもよい。 Note that this example mainly shows the functional blocks of the characteristic parts of this embodiment, and the user terminal 20 may also be assumed to have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each part described below may be omitted.
 制御部210は、ユーザ端末20全体の制御を実施する。制御部210は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるコントローラ、制御回路などから構成することができる。 The control unit 210 controls the entire user terminal 20. The control unit 210 can be configured from a controller, a control circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
 制御部210は、信号の生成、マッピングなどを制御してもよい。制御部210は、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230を用いた送受信、測定などを制御してもよい。制御部210は、信号として送信するデータ、制御情報、系列などを生成し、送受信部220に転送してもよい。 The control unit 210 may control signal generation, mapping, etc. The control unit 210 may control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 220 and the transceiver antenna 230, measurement, etc. The control unit 210 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 220.
 送受信部220は、ベースバンド部221、RF部222、測定部223を含んでもよい。ベースバンド部221は、送信処理部2211、受信処理部2212を含んでもよい。送受信部220は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるトランスミッター/レシーバー、RF回路、ベースバンド回路、フィルタ、位相シフタ、測定回路、送受信回路などから構成することができる。 The transceiver unit 220 may include a baseband unit 221, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223. The baseband unit 221 may include a transmission processing unit 2211 and a reception processing unit 2212. The transceiver unit 220 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which the present disclosure relates.
 送受信部220は、一体の送受信部として構成されてもよいし、送信部及び受信部から構成されてもよい。当該送信部は、送信処理部2211、RF部222から構成されてもよい。当該受信部は、受信処理部2212、RF部222、測定部223から構成されてもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmission unit and a reception unit. The transmission unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 2211 and an RF unit 222. The reception unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 2212, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
 送受信アンテナ230は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるアンテナ、例えばアレイアンテナなどから構成することができる。 The transmitting/receiving antenna 230 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
 送受信部220は、上述の下りリンクチャネル、同期信号、下りリンク参照信号などを受信してもよい。送受信部220は、上述の上りリンクチャネル、上りリンク参照信号などを送信してもよい。 The transceiver 220 may receive the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc. The transceiver 220 may transmit the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
 送受信部220は、デジタルビームフォーミング(例えば、プリコーディング)、アナログビームフォーミング(例えば、位相回転)などを用いて、送信ビーム及び受信ビームの少なくとも一方を形成してもよい。 The transceiver 220 may form at least one of the transmit beam and receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
 送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、例えば制御部210から取得したデータ、制御情報などに対して、PDCPレイヤの処理、RLCレイヤの処理(例えば、RLC再送制御)、MACレイヤの処理(例えば、HARQ再送制御)などを行い、送信するビット列を生成してもよい。 The transceiver 220 (transmission processor 2211) may perform PDCP layer processing, RLC layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), MAC layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on the data and control information acquired from the controller 210, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
 送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、送信するビット列に対して、チャネル符号化(誤り訂正符号化を含んでもよい)、変調、マッピング、フィルタ処理、DFT処理(必要に応じて)、IFFT処理、プリコーディング、デジタル-アナログ変換などの送信処理を行い、ベースバンド信号を出力してもよい。 The transceiver 220 (transmission processor 2211) may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
 なお、DFT処理を適用するか否かは、トランスフォームプリコーディングの設定に基づいてもよい。送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、あるチャネル(例えば、PUSCH)について、トランスフォームプリコーディングが有効(enabled)である場合、当該チャネルをDFT-s-OFDM波形を用いて送信するために上記送信処理としてDFT処理を行ってもよいし、そうでない場合、上記送信処理としてDFT処理を行わなくてもよい。 Whether or not to apply DFT processing may be based on the settings of transform precoding. When transform precoding is enabled for a certain channel (e.g., PUSCH), the transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform DFT processing as the above-mentioned transmission processing in order to transmit the channel using a DFT-s-OFDM waveform, and when transform precoding is not enabled, it is not necessary to perform DFT processing as the above-mentioned transmission processing.
 送受信部220(RF部222)は、ベースバンド信号に対して、無線周波数帯への変調、フィルタ処理、増幅などを行い、無線周波数帯の信号を、送受信アンテナ230を介して送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (RF unit 222) may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc., on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 230.
 一方、送受信部220(RF部222)は、送受信アンテナ230によって受信された無線周波数帯の信号に対して、増幅、フィルタ処理、ベースバンド信号への復調などを行ってもよい。 On the other hand, the transceiver unit 220 (RF unit 222) may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 230.
 送受信部220(受信処理部2212)は、取得されたベースバンド信号に対して、アナログ-デジタル変換、FFT処理、IDFT処理(必要に応じて)、フィルタ処理、デマッピング、復調、復号(誤り訂正復号を含んでもよい)、MACレイヤ処理、RLCレイヤの処理及びPDCPレイヤの処理などの受信処理を適用し、ユーザデータなどを取得してもよい。 The transceiver 220 (reception processor 2212) may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
 送受信部220(測定部223)は、受信した信号に関する測定を実施してもよい。例えば、測定部223は、受信した信号に基づいて、RRM測定、CSI測定などを行ってもよい。測定部223は、受信電力(例えば、RSRP)、受信品質(例えば、RSRQ、SINR、SNR)、信号強度(例えば、RSSI)、伝搬路情報(例えば、CSI)などについて測定してもよい。測定結果は、制御部210に出力されてもよい。 The transceiver 220 (measurement unit 223) may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 223 may perform RRM measurements, CSI measurements, etc. based on the received signal. The measurement unit 223 may measure received power (e.g., RSRP), received quality (e.g., RSRQ, SINR, SNR), signal strength (e.g., RSSI), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc. The measurement results may be output to the control unit 210.
 なお、本開示におけるユーザ端末20の送信部及び受信部は、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。 In addition, the transmitting unit and receiving unit of the user terminal 20 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitting/receiving unit 220 and the transmitting/receiving antenna 230.
 送受信部220は、サービングセルがレイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)セル間モビリティの候補セルとなり得るかどうかを示す設定を受信してもよい。 The transceiver 220 may receive a configuration indicating whether the serving cell can be a candidate cell for Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) inter-cell mobility.
 制御部210は、前記設定に基づいて、前記サービングセルのスイッチを制御してもよい。 The control unit 210 may control the switch of the serving cell based on the setting.
 前記設定は、セルグループ毎の、セルグループ内の全ての前記サービングセルがL1/L2セル間モビリティの前記候補セルとなり得るかどうかを示す設定であってもよい。 The setting may be a setting for each cell group indicating whether all the serving cells in the cell group can be candidate cells for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
 前記設定は、セルグループ内の各サービングセルがL1/L2セル間モビリティの前記候補セルとなり得るかどうかを示す設定であってもよい。 The setting may be a setting indicating whether each serving cell in a cell group can be a candidate cell for L1/L2 inter-cell mobility.
 前記サービングセルのスイッチは、前記候補セルとなる前記サービングセルがスペシャルセル(SpCell)またはセカンダリセル(SCell)にスイッチされることであってもよい。 The serving cell switch may be a switch of the serving cell that is the candidate cell to a special cell (SpCell) or a secondary cell (SCell).
 送受信部220は、レイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)シグナリングによりスペシャルセル(SpCell)のセルスイッチコマンドを受信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may receive a cell switch command for a special cell (SpCell) via Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling.
 制御部210は、候補セルのタイプに基づいて、当該候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスについて異なる想定を行ってもよい。 The control unit 210 may make different assumptions about the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell.
 制御部210は、前記候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスが変更されないと想定してもよい。 The control unit 210 may assume that the activation or deactivation status of the candidate cell is not changed.
 送受信部220は、前記候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化の指示を受信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may receive an instruction to activate or deactivate the candidate cell.
 送受信部220は、セルグループ内のサービングセルと候補セルについて、物理セルインデックス(PCI)の一部と関連するインデックスを受信してもよい。 The transceiver 220 may receive an index associated with a portion of the physical cell index (PCI) for the serving cell and candidate cells in the cell group.
(ハードウェア構成)
 なお、上記実施形態の説明に用いたブロック図は、機能単位のブロックを示している。これらの機能ブロック(構成部)は、ハードウェア及びソフトウェアの少なくとも一方の任意の組み合わせによって実現される。また、各機能ブロックの実現方法は特に限定されない。すなわち、各機能ブロックは、物理的又は論理的に結合した1つの装置を用いて実現されてもよいし、物理的又は論理的に分離した2つ以上の装置を直接的又は間接的に(例えば、有線、無線などを用いて)接続し、これら複数の装置を用いて実現されてもよい。機能ブロックは、上記1つの装置又は上記複数の装置にソフトウェアを組み合わせて実現されてもよい。
(Hardware configuration)
The block diagrams used in the description of the above embodiments show functional blocks. These functional blocks (components) are realized by any combination of at least one of hardware and software. The method of realizing each functional block is not particularly limited. That is, each functional block may be realized using one device that is physically or logically coupled, or may be realized using two or more devices that are physically or logically separated and directly or indirectly connected (for example, using wires, wirelessly, etc.). The functional blocks may be realized by combining the one device or the multiple devices with software.
 ここで、機能には、判断、決定、判定、計算、算出、処理、導出、調査、探索、確認、受信、送信、出力、アクセス、解決、選択、選定、確立、比較、想定、期待、みなし、報知(broadcasting)、通知(notifying)、通信(communicating)、転送(forwarding)、構成(configuring)、再構成(reconfiguring)、割り当て(allocating、mapping)、割り振り(assigning)などがあるが、これらに限られない。例えば、送信を機能させる機能ブロック(構成部)は、送信部(transmitting unit)、送信機(transmitter)などと呼称されてもよい。いずれも、上述したとおり、実現方法は特に限定されない。 Here, the functions include, but are not limited to, judgement, determination, judgment, calculation, computation, processing, derivation, investigation, search, confirmation, reception, transmission, output, access, resolution, selection, election, establishment, comparison, assumption, expectation, deeming, broadcasting, notifying, communicating, forwarding, configuring, reconfiguring, allocating, mapping, and assignment. For example, a functional block (component) that performs the transmission function may be called a transmitting unit, a transmitter, and the like. In either case, as mentioned above, there are no particular limitations on the method of realization.
 例えば、本開示の一実施形態における基地局、ユーザ端末などは、本開示の無線通信方法の処理を行うコンピュータとして機能してもよい。図16は、一実施形態に係る基地局及びユーザ端末のハードウェア構成の一例を示す図である。上述の基地局10及びユーザ端末20は、物理的には、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002、ストレージ1003、通信装置1004、入力装置1005、出力装置1006、バス1007などを含むコンピュータ装置として構成されてもよい。 For example, a base station, a user terminal, etc. in one embodiment of the present disclosure may function as a computer that performs processing of the wireless communication method of the present disclosure. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to one embodiment. The above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be physically configured as a computer device including a processor 1001, a memory 1002, a storage 1003, a communication device 1004, an input device 1005, an output device 1006, a bus 1007, etc.
 なお、本開示において、装置、回路、デバイス、部(section)、ユニットなどの文言は、互いに読み替えることができる。基地局10及びユーザ端末20のハードウェア構成は、図に示した各装置を1つ又は複数含むように構成されてもよいし、一部の装置を含まずに構成されてもよい。 In addition, in this disclosure, the terms apparatus, circuit, device, section, unit, etc. may be interpreted as interchangeable. The hardware configuration of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 may be configured to include one or more of the devices shown in the figures, or may be configured to exclude some of the devices.
 例えば、プロセッサ1001は1つだけ図示されているが、複数のプロセッサがあってもよい。また、処理は、1のプロセッサによって実行されてもよいし、処理が同時に、逐次に、又はその他の手法を用いて、2以上のプロセッサによって実行されてもよい。なお、プロセッサ1001は、1以上のチップによって実装されてもよい。 For example, although only one processor 1001 is shown, there may be multiple processors. Furthermore, processing may be performed by one processor, or processing may be performed by two or more processors simultaneously, sequentially, or using other techniques. Furthermore, the processor 1001 may be implemented by one or more chips.
 基地局10及びユーザ端末20における各機能は、例えば、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002などのハードウェア上に所定のソフトウェア(プログラム)を読み込ませることによって、プロセッサ1001が演算を行い、通信装置1004を介する通信を制御したり、メモリ1002及びストレージ1003におけるデータの読み出し及び書き込みの少なくとも一方を制御したりすることによって実現される。 The functions of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 are realized, for example, by loading specific software (programs) onto hardware such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, causing the processor 1001 to perform calculations, control communications via the communication device 1004, and control at least one of the reading and writing of data in the memory 1002 and storage 1003.
 プロセッサ1001は、例えば、オペレーティングシステムを動作させてコンピュータ全体を制御する。プロセッサ1001は、周辺装置とのインターフェース、制御装置、演算装置、レジスタなどを含む中央処理装置(Central Processing Unit(CPU))によって構成されてもよい。例えば、上述の制御部110(210)、送受信部120(220)などの少なくとも一部は、プロセッサ1001によって実現されてもよい。 The processor 1001, for example, runs an operating system to control the entire computer. The processor 1001 may be configured as a central processing unit (CPU) including an interface with peripheral devices, a control device, an arithmetic unit, registers, etc. For example, at least a portion of the above-mentioned control unit 110 (210), transmission/reception unit 120 (220), etc. may be realized by the processor 1001.
 また、プロセッサ1001は、プログラム(プログラムコード)、ソフトウェアモジュール、データなどを、ストレージ1003及び通信装置1004の少なくとも一方からメモリ1002に読み出し、これらに従って各種の処理を実行する。プログラムとしては、上述の実施形態において説明した動作の少なくとも一部をコンピュータに実行させるプログラムが用いられる。例えば、制御部110(210)は、メモリ1002に格納され、プロセッサ1001において動作する制御プログラムによって実現されてもよく、他の機能ブロックについても同様に実現されてもよい。 The processor 1001 also reads out programs (program codes), software modules, data, etc. from at least one of the storage 1003 and the communication device 1004 into the memory 1002, and executes various processes according to these. The programs used are those that cause a computer to execute at least some of the operations described in the above embodiments. For example, the control unit 110 (210) may be realized by a control program stored in the memory 1002 and running on the processor 1001, and similar implementations may be made for other functional blocks.
 メモリ1002は、コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体であり、例えば、Read Only Memory(ROM)、Erasable Programmable ROM(EPROM)、Electrically EPROM(EEPROM)、Random Access Memory(RAM)、その他の適切な記憶媒体の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。メモリ1002は、レジスタ、キャッシュ、メインメモリ(主記憶装置)などと呼ばれてもよい。メモリ1002は、本開示の一実施形態に係る無線通信方法を実施するために実行可能なプログラム(プログラムコード)、ソフトウェアモジュールなどを保存することができる。 Memory 1002 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of, for example, Read Only Memory (ROM), Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically EPROM (EEPROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), and other suitable storage media. Memory 1002 may also be called a register, cache, main memory, etc. Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program codes), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
 ストレージ1003は、コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体であり、例えば、フレキシブルディスク、フロッピー(登録商標)ディスク、光磁気ディスク(例えば、コンパクトディスク(Compact Disc ROM(CD-ROM)など)、デジタル多用途ディスク、Blu-ray(登録商標)ディスク)、リムーバブルディスク、ハードディスクドライブ、スマートカード、フラッシュメモリデバイス(例えば、カード、スティック、キードライブ)、磁気ストライプ、データベース、サーバ、その他の適切な記憶媒体の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。ストレージ1003は、補助記憶装置と呼ばれてもよい。 Storage 1003 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of a flexible disk, a floppy disk, a magneto-optical disk (e.g., a compact disk (Compact Disc ROM (CD-ROM)), a digital versatile disk, a Blu-ray disk), a removable disk, a hard disk drive, a smart card, a flash memory device (e.g., a card, a stick, a key drive), a magnetic stripe, a database, a server, or other suitable storage medium. Storage 1003 may also be referred to as an auxiliary storage device.
 通信装置1004は、有線ネットワーク及び無線ネットワークの少なくとも一方を介してコンピュータ間の通信を行うためのハードウェア(送受信デバイス)であり、例えばネットワークデバイス、ネットワークコントローラ、ネットワークカード、通信モジュールなどともいう。通信装置1004は、例えば周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD))及び時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))の少なくとも一方を実現するために、高周波スイッチ、デュプレクサ、フィルタ、周波数シンセサイザなどを含んで構成されてもよい。例えば、上述の送受信部120(220)、送受信アンテナ130(230)などは、通信装置1004によって実現されてもよい。送受信部120(220)は、送信部120a(220a)と受信部120b(220b)とで、物理的に又は論理的に分離された実装がなされてもよい。 The communication device 1004 is hardware (transmitting/receiving device) for communicating between computers via at least one of a wired network and a wireless network, and is also called, for example, a network device, a network controller, a network card, or a communication module. The communication device 1004 may be configured to include a high-frequency switch, a duplexer, a filter, a frequency synthesizer, etc., to realize at least one of Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and Time Division Duplex (TDD). For example, the above-mentioned transmitting/receiving unit 120 (220), transmitting/receiving antenna 130 (230), etc. may be realized by the communication device 1004. The transmitting/receiving unit 120 (220) may be implemented as a transmitting unit 120a (220a) and a receiving unit 120b (220b) that are physically or logically separated.
 入力装置1005は、外部からの入力を受け付ける入力デバイス(例えば、キーボード、マウス、マイクロフォン、スイッチ、ボタン、センサなど)である。出力装置1006は、外部への出力を実施する出力デバイス(例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカー、Light Emitting Diode(LED)ランプなど)である。なお、入力装置1005及び出力装置1006は、一体となった構成(例えば、タッチパネル)であってもよい。 The input device 1005 is an input device (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, etc.) that accepts input from the outside. The output device 1006 is an output device (e.g., a display, a speaker, a Light Emitting Diode (LED) lamp, etc.) that outputs to the outside. The input device 1005 and the output device 1006 may be integrated into one structure (e.g., a touch panel).
 また、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002などの各装置は、情報を通信するためのバス1007によって接続される。バス1007は、単一のバスを用いて構成されてもよいし、装置間ごとに異なるバスを用いて構成されてもよい。 Furthermore, each device such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002 is connected by a bus 1007 for communicating information. The bus 1007 may be configured using a single bus, or may be configured using different buses between each device.
 また、基地局10及びユーザ端末20は、マイクロプロセッサ、デジタル信号プロセッサ(Digital Signal Processor(DSP))、Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC)、Programmable Logic Device(PLD)、Field Programmable Gate Array(FPGA)などのハードウェアを含んで構成されてもよく、当該ハードウェアを用いて各機能ブロックの一部又は全てが実現されてもよい。例えば、プロセッサ1001は、これらのハードウェアの少なくとも1つを用いて実装されてもよい。 Furthermore, the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 may be configured to include hardware such as a microprocessor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a field programmable gate array (FPGA), and some or all of the functional blocks may be realized using the hardware. For example, the processor 1001 may be implemented using at least one of these pieces of hardware.
(変形例)
 なお、本開示において説明した用語及び本開示の理解に必要な用語については、同一の又は類似する意味を有する用語と置き換えてもよい。例えば、チャネル、シンボル及び信号(シグナル又はシグナリング)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、信号はメッセージであってもよい。参照信号(reference signal)は、RSと略称することもでき、適用される標準によってパイロット(Pilot)、パイロット信号などと呼ばれてもよい。また、コンポーネントキャリア(Component Carrier(CC))は、セル、周波数キャリア、キャリア周波数などと呼ばれてもよい。
(Modification)
In addition, the terms described in this disclosure and the terms necessary for understanding this disclosure may be replaced with terms having the same or similar meanings. For example, a channel, a symbol, and a signal (signal or signaling) may be read as mutually interchangeable. A signal may also be a message. A reference signal may be abbreviated as RS, and may be called a pilot, a pilot signal, or the like depending on the applied standard. A component carrier (CC) may also be called a cell, a frequency carrier, a carrier frequency, or the like.
 無線フレームは、時間領域において1つ又は複数の期間(フレーム)によって構成されてもよい。無線フレームを構成する当該1つ又は複数の各期間(フレーム)は、サブフレームと呼ばれてもよい。さらに、サブフレームは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のスロットによって構成されてもよい。サブフレームは、ニューメロロジー(numerology)に依存しない固定の時間長(例えば、1ms)であってもよい。 A radio frame may be composed of one or more periods (frames) in the time domain. Each of the one or more periods (frames) constituting a radio frame may be called a subframe. Furthermore, a subframe may be composed of one or more slots in the time domain. A subframe may have a fixed time length (e.g., 1 ms) that is independent of numerology.
 ここで、ニューメロロジーは、ある信号又はチャネルの送信及び受信の少なくとも一方に適用される通信パラメータであってもよい。ニューメロロジーは、例えば、サブキャリア間隔(SubCarrier Spacing(SCS))、帯域幅、シンボル長、サイクリックプレフィックス長、送信時間間隔(Transmission Time Interval(TTI))、TTIあたりのシンボル数、無線フレーム構成、送受信機が周波数領域において行う特定のフィルタリング処理、送受信機が時間領域において行う特定のウィンドウイング処理などの少なくとも1つを示してもよい。 Here, the numerology may be a communication parameter that is applied to at least one of the transmission and reception of a signal or channel. The numerology may indicate, for example, at least one of the following: SubCarrier Spacing (SCS), bandwidth, symbol length, cyclic prefix length, Transmission Time Interval (TTI), number of symbols per TTI, radio frame configuration, a specific filtering process performed by the transceiver in the frequency domain, a specific windowing process performed by the transceiver in the time domain, etc.
 スロットは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のシンボル(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM)シンボル、Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access(SC-FDMA)シンボルなど)によって構成されてもよい。また、スロットは、ニューメロロジーに基づく時間単位であってもよい。 A slot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain (such as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) symbols, etc.). A slot may also be a time unit based on numerology.
 スロットは、複数のミニスロットを含んでもよい。各ミニスロットは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のシンボルによって構成されてもよい。また、ミニスロットは、サブスロットと呼ばれてもよい。ミニスロットは、スロットよりも少ない数のシンボルによって構成されてもよい。ミニスロットより大きい時間単位で送信されるPDSCH(又はPUSCH)は、PDSCH(PUSCH)マッピングタイプAと呼ばれてもよい。ミニスロットを用いて送信されるPDSCH(又はPUSCH)は、PDSCH(PUSCH)マッピングタイプBと呼ばれてもよい。 A slot may include multiple minislots. Each minislot may consist of one or multiple symbols in the time domain. A minislot may also be called a subslot. A minislot may consist of fewer symbols than a slot. A PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted in a time unit larger than a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type A. A PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted using a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type B.
 無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルは、いずれも信号を伝送する際の時間単位を表す。無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルは、それぞれに対応する別の呼称が用いられてもよい。なお、本開示におけるフレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット、シンボルなどの時間単位は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 A radio frame, a subframe, a slot, a minislot, and a symbol all represent time units when transmitting a signal. A different name may be used for a radio frame, a subframe, a slot, a minislot, and a symbol, respectively. Note that the time units such as a frame, a subframe, a slot, a minislot, and a symbol in this disclosure may be read as interchangeable.
 例えば、1サブフレームはTTIと呼ばれてもよいし、複数の連続したサブフレームがTTIと呼ばれてよいし、1スロット又は1ミニスロットがTTIと呼ばれてもよい。つまり、サブフレーム及びTTIの少なくとも一方は、既存のLTEにおけるサブフレーム(1ms)であってもよいし、1msより短い期間(例えば、1-13シンボル)であってもよいし、1msより長い期間であってもよい。なお、TTIを表す単位は、サブフレームではなくスロット、ミニスロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。 For example, one subframe may be called a TTI, multiple consecutive subframes may be called a TTI, or one slot or one minislot may be called a TTI. In other words, at least one of the subframe and the TTI may be a subframe (1 ms) in existing LTE, a period shorter than 1 ms (e.g., 1-13 symbols), or a period longer than 1 ms. Note that the unit representing the TTI may be called a slot, minislot, etc., instead of a subframe.
 ここで、TTIは、例えば、無線通信におけるスケジューリングの最小時間単位のことをいう。例えば、LTEシステムでは、基地局が各ユーザ端末に対して、無線リソース(各ユーザ端末において使用することが可能な周波数帯域幅、送信電力など)を、TTI単位で割り当てるスケジューリングを行う。なお、TTIの定義はこれに限られない。 Here, TTI refers to, for example, the smallest time unit for scheduling in wireless communication. For example, in an LTE system, a base station schedules each user terminal by allocating radio resources (such as frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal) in TTI units. Note that the definition of TTI is not limited to this.
 TTIは、チャネル符号化されたデータパケット(トランスポートブロック)、コードブロック、コードワードなどの送信時間単位であってもよいし、スケジューリング、リンクアダプテーションなどの処理単位となってもよい。なお、TTIが与えられたとき、実際にトランスポートブロック、コードブロック、コードワードなどがマッピングされる時間区間(例えば、シンボル数)は、当該TTIよりも短くてもよい。 The TTI may be a transmission time unit for a channel-coded data packet (transport block), a code block, a code word, etc., or may be a processing unit for scheduling, link adaptation, etc. When a TTI is given, the time interval (e.g., the number of symbols) in which a transport block, a code block, a code word, etc. is actually mapped may be shorter than the TTI.
 なお、1スロット又は1ミニスロットがTTIと呼ばれる場合、1以上のTTI(すなわち、1以上のスロット又は1以上のミニスロット)が、スケジューリングの最小時間単位となってもよい。また、当該スケジューリングの最小時間単位を構成するスロット数(ミニスロット数)は制御されてもよい。 Note that when one slot or one minislot is called a TTI, one or more TTIs (i.e., one or more slots or one or more minislots) may be the minimum time unit of scheduling. In addition, the number of slots (minislots) that constitute the minimum time unit of scheduling may be controlled.
 1msの時間長を有するTTIは、通常TTI(3GPP Rel.8-12におけるTTI)、ノーマルTTI、ロングTTI、通常サブフレーム、ノーマルサブフレーム、ロングサブフレーム、スロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。通常TTIより短いTTIは、短縮TTI、ショートTTI、部分TTI(partial又はfractional TTI)、短縮サブフレーム、ショートサブフレーム、ミニスロット、サブスロット、スロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。 A TTI having a time length of 1 ms may be called a normal TTI (TTI in 3GPP Rel. 8-12), normal TTI, long TTI, normal subframe, normal subframe, long subframe, slot, etc. A TTI shorter than a normal TTI may be called a shortened TTI, short TTI, partial or fractional TTI, shortened subframe, short subframe, minislot, subslot, slot, etc.
 なお、ロングTTI(例えば、通常TTI、サブフレームなど)は、1msを超える時間長を有するTTIで読み替えてもよいし、ショートTTI(例えば、短縮TTIなど)は、ロングTTIのTTI長未満かつ1ms以上のTTI長を有するTTIで読み替えてもよい。 Note that a long TTI (e.g., a normal TTI, a subframe, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a time length of more than 1 ms, and a short TTI (e.g., a shortened TTI, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a TTI length shorter than the TTI length of a long TTI and equal to or greater than 1 ms.
 リソースブロック(Resource Block(RB))は、時間領域及び周波数領域のリソース割当単位であり、周波数領域において、1つ又は複数個の連続した副搬送波(サブキャリア(subcarrier))を含んでもよい。RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数は、ニューメロロジーに関わらず同じであってもよく、例えば12であってもよい。RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数は、ニューメロロジーに基づいて決定されてもよい。 A resource block (RB) is a resource allocation unit in the time domain and frequency domain, and may include one or more consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. The number of subcarriers included in an RB may be the same regardless of numerology, and may be, for example, 12. The number of subcarriers included in an RB may be determined based on numerology.
 また、RBは、時間領域において、1つ又は複数個のシンボルを含んでもよく、1スロット、1ミニスロット、1サブフレーム又は1TTIの長さであってもよい。1TTI、1サブフレームなどは、それぞれ1つ又は複数のリソースブロックによって構成されてもよい。 Furthermore, an RB may include one or more symbols in the time domain and may be one slot, one minislot, one subframe, or one TTI in length. One TTI, one subframe, etc. may each be composed of one or more resource blocks.
 なお、1つ又は複数のRBは、物理リソースブロック(Physical RB(PRB))、サブキャリアグループ(Sub-Carrier Group(SCG))、リソースエレメントグループ(Resource Element Group(REG))、PRBペア、RBペアなどと呼ばれてもよい。 In addition, one or more RBs may be referred to as a physical resource block (Physical RB (PRB)), a sub-carrier group (Sub-Carrier Group (SCG)), a resource element group (Resource Element Group (REG)), a PRB pair, an RB pair, etc.
 また、リソースブロックは、1つ又は複数のリソースエレメント(Resource Element(RE))によって構成されてもよい。例えば、1REは、1サブキャリア及び1シンボルの無線リソース領域であってもよい。 Furthermore, a resource block may be composed of one or more resource elements (REs). For example, one RE may be a radio resource area of one subcarrier and one symbol.
 帯域幅部分(Bandwidth Part(BWP))(部分帯域幅などと呼ばれてもよい)は、あるキャリアにおいて、あるニューメロロジー用の連続する共通RB(common resource blocks)のサブセットのことを表してもよい。ここで、共通RBは、当該キャリアの共通参照ポイントを基準としたRBのインデックスによって特定されてもよい。PRBは、あるBWPで定義され、当該BWP内で番号付けされてもよい。 A Bandwidth Part (BWP), which may also be referred to as a partial bandwidth, may represent a subset of contiguous common resource blocks (RBs) for a given numerology on a given carrier, where the common RBs may be identified by an index of the RB relative to a common reference point of the carrier. PRBs may be defined in a BWP and numbered within the BWP.
 BWPには、UL BWP(UL用のBWP)と、DL BWP(DL用のBWP)とが含まれてもよい。UEに対して、1キャリア内に1つ又は複数のBWPが設定されてもよい。 The BWP may include a UL BWP (BWP for UL) and a DL BWP (BWP for DL). One or more BWPs may be configured for a UE within one carrier.
 設定されたBWPの少なくとも1つがアクティブであってもよく、UEは、アクティブなBWPの外で所定の信号/チャネルを送受信することを想定しなくてもよい。なお、本開示における「セル」、「キャリア」などは、「BWP」で読み替えられてもよい。 At least one of the configured BWPs may be active, and the UE may not expect to transmit or receive a given signal/channel outside the active BWP. Note that "cell," "carrier," etc. in this disclosure may be read as "BWP."
 なお、上述した無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルなどの構造は例示に過ぎない。例えば、無線フレームに含まれるサブフレームの数、サブフレーム又は無線フレームあたりのスロットの数、スロット内に含まれるミニスロットの数、スロット又はミニスロットに含まれるシンボル及びRBの数、RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数、並びにTTI内のシンボル数、シンボル長、サイクリックプレフィックス(Cyclic Prefix(CP))長などの構成は、様々に変更することができる。 Note that the above-mentioned structures of radio frames, subframes, slots, minislots, and symbols are merely examples. For example, the number of subframes included in a radio frame, the number of slots per subframe or radio frame, the number of minislots included in a slot, the number of symbols and RBs included in a slot or minislot, the number of subcarriers included in an RB, as well as the number of symbols in a TTI, the symbol length, and the cyclic prefix (CP) length can be changed in various ways.
 また、本開示において説明した情報、パラメータなどは、絶対値を用いて表されてもよいし、所定の値からの相対値を用いて表されてもよいし、対応する別の情報を用いて表されてもよい。例えば、無線リソースは、所定のインデックスによって指示されてもよい。 In addition, the information, parameters, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using absolute values, may be represented using relative values from a predetermined value, or may be represented using other corresponding information. For example, a radio resource may be indicated by a predetermined index.
 本開示においてパラメータなどに使用する名称は、いかなる点においても限定的な名称ではない。さらに、これらのパラメータを使用する数式などは、本開示において明示的に開示したものと異なってもよい。様々なチャネル(PUCCH、PDCCHなど)及び情報要素は、あらゆる好適な名称によって識別できるので、これらの様々なチャネル及び情報要素に割り当てている様々な名称は、いかなる点においても限定的な名称ではない。 The names used for parameters and the like in this disclosure are not limiting in any respect. Furthermore, the formulas and the like using these parameters may differ from those explicitly disclosed in this disclosure. The various channels (PUCCH, PDCCH, etc.) and information elements may be identified by any suitable names, and therefore the various names assigned to these various channels and information elements are not limiting in any respect.
 本開示において説明した情報、信号などは、様々な異なる技術のいずれかを使用して表されてもよい。例えば、上記の説明全体に渡って言及され得るデータ、命令、コマンド、情報、信号、ビット、シンボル、チップなどは、電圧、電流、電磁波、磁界若しくは磁性粒子、光場若しくは光子、又はこれらの任意の組み合わせによって表されてもよい。 The information, signals, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies. For example, the data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, chips, etc. that may be referred to throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or magnetic particles, optical fields or photons, or any combination thereof.
 また、情報、信号などは、上位レイヤから下位レイヤ及び下位レイヤから上位レイヤの少なくとも一方へ出力され得る。情報、信号などは、複数のネットワークノードを介して入出力されてもよい。 Information, signals, etc. may be output from a higher layer to a lower layer and/or from a lower layer to a higher layer. Information, signals, etc. may be input/output via multiple network nodes.
 入出力された情報、信号などは、特定の場所(例えば、メモリ)に保存されてもよいし、管理テーブルを用いて管理してもよい。入出力される情報、信号などは、上書き、更新又は追記をされ得る。出力された情報、信号などは、削除されてもよい。入力された情報、信号などは、他の装置へ送信されてもよい。 Input/output information, signals, etc. may be stored in a specific location (e.g., memory) or may be managed using a management table. Input/output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to. Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted. Input information, signals, etc. may be transmitted to another device.
 情報の通知は、本開示において説明した態様/実施形態に限られず、他の方法を用いて行われてもよい。例えば、本開示における情報の通知は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))、上り制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI)))、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、Radio Resource Control(RRC)シグナリング、ブロードキャスト情報(マスタ情報ブロック(Master Information Block(MIB))、システム情報ブロック(System Information Block(SIB))など)、Medium Access Control(MAC)シグナリング)、その他の信号又はこれらの組み合わせによって実施されてもよい。 The notification of information is not limited to the aspects/embodiments described in this disclosure, and may be performed using other methods. For example, the notification of information in this disclosure may be performed by physical layer signaling (e.g., Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI)), higher layer signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, broadcast information (Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block (SIB)), etc.), Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling), other signals, or a combination of these.
 なお、物理レイヤシグナリングは、Layer 1/Layer 2(L1/L2)制御情報(L1/L2制御信号)、L1制御情報(L1制御信号)などと呼ばれてもよい。また、RRCシグナリングは、RRCメッセージと呼ばれてもよく、例えば、RRC接続セットアップ(RRC Connection Setup)メッセージ、RRC接続再構成(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)メッセージなどであってもよい。また、MACシグナリングは、例えば、MAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(CE))を用いて通知されてもよい。 The physical layer signaling may be called Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) control information (L1/L2 control signal), L1 control information (L1 control signal), etc. The RRC signaling may be called an RRC message, for example, an RRC Connection Setup message, an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, etc. The MAC signaling may be notified, for example, using a MAC Control Element (CE).
 また、所定の情報の通知(例えば、「Xであること」の通知)は、明示的な通知に限られず、暗示的に(例えば、当該所定の情報の通知を行わないことによって又は別の情報の通知によって)行われてもよい。 Furthermore, notification of specified information (e.g., notification that "X is the case") is not limited to explicit notification, but may be implicit (e.g., by not notifying the specified information or by notifying other information).
 判定は、1ビットで表される値(0か1か)によって行われてもよいし、真(true)又は偽(false)で表される真偽値(boolean)によって行われてもよいし、数値の比較(例えば、所定の値との比較)によって行われてもよい。 The determination may be based on a value represented by a single bit (0 or 1), a Boolean value represented by true or false, or a comparison of numerical values (e.g., with a predetermined value).
 ソフトウェアは、ソフトウェア、ファームウェア、ミドルウェア、マイクロコード、ハードウェア記述言語と呼ばれるか、他の名称で呼ばれるかを問わず、命令、命令セット、コード、コードセグメント、プログラムコード、プログラム、サブプログラム、ソフトウェアモジュール、アプリケーション、ソフトウェアアプリケーション、ソフトウェアパッケージ、ルーチン、サブルーチン、オブジェクト、実行可能ファイル、実行スレッド、手順、機能などを意味するよう広く解釈されるべきである。 Software shall be construed broadly to mean instructions, instruction sets, code, code segments, program code, programs, subprograms, software modules, applications, software applications, software packages, routines, subroutines, objects, executable files, threads of execution, procedures, functions, etc., whether referred to as software, firmware, middleware, microcode, hardware description language, or otherwise.
 また、ソフトウェア、命令、情報などは、伝送媒体を介して送受信されてもよい。例えば、ソフトウェアが、有線技術(同軸ケーブル、光ファイバケーブル、ツイストペア、デジタル加入者回線(Digital Subscriber Line(DSL))など)及び無線技術(赤外線、マイクロ波など)の少なくとも一方を使用してウェブサイト、サーバ、又は他のリモートソースから送信される場合、これらの有線技術及び無線技術の少なくとも一方は、伝送媒体の定義内に含まれる。 Software, instructions, information, etc. may also be transmitted and received via a transmission medium. For example, if the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using at least one of wired technologies (such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)), and/or wireless technologies (such as infrared, microwave, etc.), then at least one of these wired and wireless technologies is included within the definition of a transmission medium.
 本開示において使用する「システム」及び「ネットワーク」という用語は、互換的に使用され得る。「ネットワーク」は、ネットワークに含まれる装置(例えば、基地局)のことを意味してもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the terms "system" and "network" may be used interchangeably. "Network" may refer to the devices included in the network (e.g., base stations).
 本開示において、「プリコーディング」、「プリコーダ」、「ウェイト(プリコーディングウェイト)」、「擬似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))」、「Transmission Configuration Indication state(TCI状態)」、「空間関係(spatial relation)」、「空間ドメインフィルタ(spatial domain filter)」、「送信電力」、「位相回転」、「アンテナポート」、「アンテナポートグル-プ」、「レイヤ」、「レイヤ数」、「ランク」、「リソース」、「リソースセット」、「リソースグループ」、「ビーム」、「ビーム幅」、「ビーム角度」、「アンテナ」、「アンテナ素子」、「パネル」などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。 In this disclosure, terms such as "precoding," "precoder," "weight (precoding weight)," "Quasi-Co-Location (QCL)," "Transmission Configuration Indication state (TCI state)," "spatial relation," "spatial domain filter," "transmit power," "phase rotation," "antenna port," "antenna port group," "layer," "number of layers," "rank," "resource," "resource set," "resource group," "beam," "beam width," "beam angle," "antenna," "antenna element," and "panel" may be used interchangeably.
 本開示においては、「基地局(Base Station(BS))」、「無線基地局」、「固定局(fixed station)」、「NodeB」、「eNB(eNodeB)」、「gNB(gNodeB)」、「アクセスポイント(access point)」、「送信ポイント(Transmission Point(TP))」、「受信ポイント(Reception Point(RP))」、「送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))」、「パネル」、「セル」、「セクタ」、「セルグループ」、「キャリア」、「コンポーネントキャリア」などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。基地局は、マクロセル、スモールセル、フェムトセル、ピコセルなどの用語で呼ばれる場合もある。 In this disclosure, terms such as "Base Station (BS)", "Radio base station", "Fixed station", "NodeB", "eNB (eNodeB)", "gNB (gNodeB)", "Access point", "Transmission Point (TP)", "Reception Point (RP)", "Transmission/Reception Point (TRP)", "Panel", "Cell", "Sector", "Cell group", "Carrier", "Component carrier", etc. may be used interchangeably. Base stations may also be referred to by terms such as macrocell, small cell, femtocell, picocell, etc.
 基地局は、1つ又は複数(例えば、3つ)のセルを収容することができる。基地局が複数のセルを収容する場合、基地局のカバレッジエリア全体は複数のより小さいエリアに区分でき、各々のより小さいエリアは、基地局サブシステム(例えば、屋内用の小型基地局(Remote Radio Head(RRH)))によって通信サービスを提供することもできる。「セル」又は「セクタ」という用語は、このカバレッジにおいて通信サービスを行う基地局及び基地局サブシステムの少なくとも一方のカバレッジエリアの一部又は全体を指す。 A base station can accommodate one or more (e.g., three) cells. When a base station accommodates multiple cells, the entire coverage area of the base station can be divided into multiple smaller areas, and each smaller area can also provide communication services by a base station subsystem (e.g., a small base station for indoor use (Remote Radio Head (RRH))). The term "cell" or "sector" refers to a part or the entire coverage area of at least one of the base station and base station subsystems that provide communication services in this coverage.
 本開示において、基地局が端末に情報を送信することは、当該基地局が当該端末に対して、当該情報に基づく制御/動作を指示することと、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, a base station transmitting information to a terminal may be interpreted as the base station instructing the terminal to control/operate based on the information.
 本開示においては、「移動局(Mobile Station(MS))」、「ユーザ端末(user terminal)」、「ユーザ装置(User Equipment(UE))」、「端末」などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。 In this disclosure, terms such as "Mobile Station (MS)", "user terminal", "User Equipment (UE)", and "terminal" may be used interchangeably.
 移動局は、加入者局、モバイルユニット、加入者ユニット、ワイヤレスユニット、リモートユニット、モバイルデバイス、ワイヤレスデバイス、ワイヤレス通信デバイス、リモートデバイス、モバイル加入者局、アクセス端末、モバイル端末、ワイヤレス端末、リモート端末、ハンドセット、ユーザエージェント、モバイルクライアント、クライアント又はいくつかの他の適切な用語で呼ばれる場合もある。 A mobile station may also be referred to as a subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client, or some other suitable terminology.
 基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、送信装置、受信装置、無線通信装置などと呼ばれてもよい。なお、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、移動体(moving object)に搭載されたデバイス、移動体自体などであってもよい。 At least one of the base station and the mobile station may be called a transmitting device, a receiving device, a wireless communication device, etc. In addition, at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be a device mounted on a moving object, the moving object itself, etc.
 当該移動体は、移動可能な物体をいい、移動速度は任意であり、移動体が停止している場合も当然含む。当該移動体は、例えば、車両、輸送車両、自動車、自動二輪車、自転車、コネクテッドカー、ショベルカー、ブルドーザー、ホイールローダー、ダンプトラック、フォークリフト、列車、バス、リヤカー、人力車、船舶(ship and other watercraft)、飛行機、ロケット、人工衛星、ドローン、マルチコプター、クアッドコプター、気球及びこれらに搭載される物を含み、またこれらに限られない。また、当該移動体は、運行指令に基づいて自律走行する移動体であってもよい。 The moving body in question refers to an object that can move, and the moving speed is arbitrary, and of course includes the case where the moving body is stationary. The moving body in question includes, but is not limited to, vehicles, transport vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, bicycles, connected cars, excavators, bulldozers, wheel loaders, dump trucks, forklifts, trains, buses, handcarts, rickshaws, ships and other watercraft, airplanes, rockets, artificial satellites, drones, multicopters, quadcopters, balloons, and objects mounted on these. The moving body in question may also be a moving body that moves autonomously based on an operating command.
 当該移動体は、乗り物(例えば、車、飛行機など)であってもよいし、無人で動く移動体(例えば、ドローン、自動運転車など)であってもよいし、ロボット(有人型又は無人型)であってもよい。なお、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、必ずしも通信動作時に移動しない装置も含む。例えば、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、センサなどのInternet of Things(IoT)機器であってもよい。 The moving object may be a vehicle (e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.), an unmanned moving object (e.g., a drone, an autonomous vehicle, etc.), or a robot (manned or unmanned). Note that at least one of the base station and the mobile station may also include devices that do not necessarily move during communication operations. For example, at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be an Internet of Things (IoT) device such as a sensor.
 図17は、一実施形態に係る車両の一例を示す図である。車両40は、駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、電子制御部49、各種センサ(電流センサ50、回転数センサ51、空気圧センサ52、車速センサ53、加速度センサ54、アクセルペダルセンサ55、ブレーキペダルセンサ56、シフトレバーセンサ57、及び物体検知センサ58を含む)、情報サービス部59と通信モジュール60を備える。 FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment. The vehicle 40 includes a drive unit 41, a steering unit 42, an accelerator pedal 43, a brake pedal 44, a shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, an axle 48, an electronic control unit 49, various sensors (including a current sensor 50, a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58), an information service unit 59, and a communication module 60.
 駆動部41は、例えば、エンジン、モータ、エンジンとモータのハイブリッドの少なくとも1つで構成される。操舵部42は、少なくともステアリングホイール(ハンドルとも呼ぶ)を含み、ユーザによって操作されるステアリングホイールの操作に基づいて前輪46及び後輪47の少なくとも一方を操舵するように構成される。 The drive unit 41 is composed of at least one of an engine, a motor, and a hybrid of an engine and a motor, for example. The steering unit 42 includes at least a steering wheel (also called a handlebar), and is configured to steer at least one of the front wheels 46 and the rear wheels 47 based on the operation of the steering wheel operated by the user.
 電子制御部49は、マイクロプロセッサ61、メモリ(ROM、RAM)62、通信ポート(例えば、入出力(Input/Output(IO))ポート)63で構成される。電子制御部49には、車両に備えられた各種センサ50-58からの信号が入力される。電子制御部49は、Electronic Control Unit(ECU)と呼ばれてもよい。 The electronic control unit 49 is composed of a microprocessor 61, memory (ROM, RAM) 62, and a communication port (e.g., an Input/Output (IO) port) 63. Signals are input to the electronic control unit 49 from various sensors 50-58 provided in the vehicle. The electronic control unit 49 may also be called an Electronic Control Unit (ECU).
 各種センサ50-58からの信号としては、モータの電流をセンシングする電流センサ50からの電流信号、回転数センサ51によって取得された前輪46/後輪47の回転数信号、空気圧センサ52によって取得された前輪46/後輪47の空気圧信号、車速センサ53によって取得された車速信号、加速度センサ54によって取得された加速度信号、アクセルペダルセンサ55によって取得されたアクセルペダル43の踏み込み量信号、ブレーキペダルセンサ56によって取得されたブレーキペダル44の踏み込み量信号、シフトレバーセンサ57によって取得されたシフトレバー45の操作信号、物体検知センサ58によって取得された障害物、車両、歩行者などを検出するための検出信号などがある。 Signals from the various sensors 50-58 include a current signal from a current sensor 50 that senses the motor current, a rotation speed signal of the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 acquired by a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure signal of the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 acquired by an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed signal acquired by a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration signal acquired by an acceleration sensor 54, a depression amount signal of the accelerator pedal 43 acquired by an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a depression amount signal of the brake pedal 44 acquired by a brake pedal sensor 56, an operation signal of the shift lever 45 acquired by a shift lever sensor 57, and a detection signal for detecting obstacles, vehicles, pedestrians, etc. acquired by an object detection sensor 58.
 情報サービス部59は、カーナビゲーションシステム、オーディオシステム、スピーカー、ディスプレイ、テレビ、ラジオ、といった、運転情報、交通情報、エンターテイメント情報などの各種情報を提供(出力)するための各種機器と、これらの機器を制御する1つ以上のECUとから構成される。情報サービス部59は、外部装置から通信モジュール60などを介して取得した情報を利用して、車両40の乗員に各種情報/サービス(例えば、マルチメディア情報/マルチメディアサービス)を提供する。 The information service unit 59 is composed of various devices, such as a car navigation system, audio system, speakers, displays, televisions, and radios, for providing (outputting) various information such as driving information, traffic information, and entertainment information, and one or more ECUs that control these devices. The information service unit 59 uses information acquired from external devices via the communication module 60, etc., to provide various information/services (e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services) to the occupants of the vehicle 40.
 情報サービス部59は、外部からの入力を受け付ける入力デバイス(例えば、キーボード、マウス、マイクロフォン、スイッチ、ボタン、センサ、タッチパネルなど)を含んでもよいし、外部への出力を実施する出力デバイス(例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカー、LEDランプ、タッチパネルなど)を含んでもよい。 The information service unit 59 may include input devices (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, a touch panel, etc.) that accept input from the outside, and may also include output devices (e.g., a display, a speaker, an LED lamp, a touch panel, etc.) that perform output to the outside.
 運転支援システム部64は、ミリ波レーダ、Light Detection and Ranging(LiDAR)、カメラ、測位ロケータ(例えば、Global Navigation Satellite System(GNSS)など)、地図情報(例えば、高精細(High Definition(HD))マップ、自動運転車(Autonomous Vehicle(AV))マップなど)、ジャイロシステム(例えば、慣性計測装置(Inertial Measurement Unit(IMU))、慣性航法装置(Inertial Navigation System(INS))など)、人工知能(Artificial Intelligence(AI))チップ、AIプロセッサといった、事故を未然に防止したりドライバの運転負荷を軽減したりするための機能を提供するための各種機器と、これらの機器を制御する1つ以上のECUとから構成される。また、運転支援システム部64は、通信モジュール60を介して各種情報を送受信し、運転支援機能又は自動運転機能を実現する。 The driving assistance system unit 64 is composed of various devices that provide functions for preventing accidents and reducing the driver's driving load, such as a millimeter wave radar, a Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR), a camera, a positioning locator (e.g., a Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)), map information (e.g., a High Definition (HD) map, an Autonomous Vehicle (AV) map, etc.), a gyro system (e.g., an Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU), an Inertial Navigation System (INS), etc.), an Artificial Intelligence (AI) chip, and an AI processor, and one or more ECUs that control these devices. The driving assistance system unit 64 also transmits and receives various information via the communication module 60 to realize a driving assistance function or an autonomous driving function.
 通信モジュール60は、通信ポート63を介して、マイクロプロセッサ61及び車両40の構成要素と通信することができる。例えば、通信モジュール60は通信ポート63を介して、車両40に備えられた駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、電子制御部49内のマイクロプロセッサ61及びメモリ(ROM、RAM)62、各種センサ50-58との間でデータ(情報)を送受信する。 The communication module 60 can communicate with the microprocessor 61 and components of the vehicle 40 via the communication port 63. For example, the communication module 60 transmits and receives data (information) via the communication port 63 between the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, the microprocessor 61 and memory (ROM, RAM) 62 in the electronic control unit 49, and the various sensors 50-58 that are provided on the vehicle 40.
 通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49のマイクロプロセッサ61によって制御可能であり、外部装置と通信を行うことが可能な通信デバイスである。例えば、外部装置との間で無線通信を介して各種情報の送受信を行う。通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49の内部と外部のどちらにあってもよい。外部装置は、例えば、上述の基地局10、ユーザ端末20などであってもよい。また、通信モジュール60は、例えば、上述の基地局10及びユーザ端末20の少なくとも1つであってもよい(基地局10及びユーザ端末20の少なくとも1つとして機能してもよい)。 The communication module 60 is a communication device that can be controlled by the microprocessor 61 of the electronic control unit 49 and can communicate with an external device. For example, it transmits and receives various information to and from the external device via wireless communication. The communication module 60 may be located either inside or outside the electronic control unit 49. The external device may be, for example, the above-mentioned base station 10 or user terminal 20. The communication module 60 may also be, for example, at least one of the above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 (it may function as at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20).
 通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49に入力された上述の各種センサ50-58からの信号、当該信号に基づいて得られる情報、及び情報サービス部59を介して得られる外部(ユーザ)からの入力に基づく情報、の少なくとも1つを、無線通信を介して外部装置へ送信してもよい。電子制御部49、各種センサ50-58、情報サービス部59などは、入力を受け付ける入力部と呼ばれてもよい。例えば、通信モジュール60によって送信されるPUSCHは、上記入力に基づく情報を含んでもよい。 The communication module 60 may transmit at least one of the signals from the various sensors 50-58 described above input to the electronic control unit 49, information obtained based on the signals, and information based on input from the outside (user) obtained via the information service unit 59 to an external device via wireless communication. The electronic control unit 49, the various sensors 50-58, the information service unit 59, etc. may be referred to as input units that accept input. For example, the PUSCH transmitted by the communication module 60 may include information based on the above input.
 通信モジュール60は、外部装置から送信されてきた種々の情報(交通情報、信号情報、車間情報など)を受信し、車両に備えられた情報サービス部59へ表示する。情報サービス部59は、情報を出力する(例えば、通信モジュール60によって受信されるPDSCH(又は当該PDSCHから復号されるデータ/情報)に基づいてディスプレイ、スピーカーなどの機器に情報を出力する)出力部と呼ばれてもよい。 The communication module 60 receives various information (traffic information, signal information, vehicle distance information, etc.) transmitted from an external device and displays it on an information service unit 59 provided in the vehicle. The information service unit 59 may also be called an output unit that outputs information (for example, outputs information to a device such as a display or speaker based on the PDSCH (or data/information decoded from the PDSCH) received by the communication module 60).
 また、通信モジュール60は、外部装置から受信した種々の情報をマイクロプロセッサ61によって利用可能なメモリ62へ記憶する。メモリ62に記憶された情報に基づいて、マイクロプロセッサ61が車両40に備えられた駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、各種センサ50-58などの制御を行ってもよい。 The communication module 60 also stores various information received from external devices in memory 62 that can be used by the microprocessor 61. Based on the information stored in memory 62, the microprocessor 61 may control the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, various sensors 50-58, and the like provided on the vehicle 40.
 また、本開示における基地局は、ユーザ端末で読み替えてもよい。例えば、基地局及びユーザ端末間の通信を、複数のユーザ端末間の通信(例えば、Device-to-Device(D2D)、Vehicle-to-Everything(V2X)などと呼ばれてもよい)に置き換えた構成について、本開示の各態様/実施形態を適用してもよい。この場合、上述の基地局10が有する機能をユーザ端末20が有する構成としてもよい。また、「上りリンク(uplink)」、「下りリンク(downlink)」などの文言は、端末間通信に対応する文言(例えば、「サイドリンク(sidelink)」)で読み替えられてもよい。例えば、上りリンクチャネル、下りリンクチャネルなどは、サイドリンクチャネルで読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, the base station in the present disclosure may be read as a user terminal. For example, each aspect/embodiment of the present disclosure may be applied to a configuration in which communication between a base station and a user terminal is replaced with communication between multiple user terminals (which may be called, for example, Device-to-Device (D2D), Vehicle-to-Everything (V2X), etc.). In this case, the user terminal 20 may be configured to have the functions of the base station 10 described above. Furthermore, terms such as "uplink" and "downlink" may be read as terms corresponding to terminal-to-terminal communication (for example, "sidelink"). For example, the uplink channel, downlink channel, etc. may be read as the sidelink channel.
 同様に、本開示におけるユーザ端末は、基地局で読み替えてもよい。この場合、上述のユーザ端末20が有する機能を基地局10が有する構成としてもよい。 Similarly, the user terminal in this disclosure may be interpreted as a base station. In this case, the base station 10 may be configured to have the functions of the user terminal 20 described above.
 本開示において、基地局によって行われるとした動作は、場合によってはその上位ノード(upper node)によって行われることもある。基地局を有する1つ又は複数のネットワークノード(network nodes)を含むネットワークにおいて、端末との通信のために行われる様々な動作は、基地局、基地局以外の1つ以上のネットワークノード(例えば、Mobility Management Entity(MME)、Serving-Gateway(S-GW)などが考えられるが、これらに限られない)又はこれらの組み合わせによって行われ得ることは明らかである。 In this disclosure, operations that are described as being performed by a base station may in some cases be performed by its upper node. In a network that includes one or more network nodes having base stations, it is clear that various operations performed for communication with terminals may be performed by the base station, one or more network nodes other than the base station (such as, but not limited to, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving-Gateway (S-GW)), or a combination of these.
 本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態は単独で用いてもよいし、組み合わせて用いてもよいし、実行に伴って切り替えて用いてもよい。また、本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態の処理手順、シーケンス、フローチャートなどは、矛盾の無い限り、順序を入れ替えてもよい。例えば、本開示において説明した方法については、例示的な順序を用いて様々なステップの要素を提示しており、提示した特定の順序に限定されない。 Each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be used alone, in combination, or switched between depending on the implementation. In addition, the processing procedures, sequences, flow charts, etc. of each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be rearranged as long as there is no inconsistency. For example, the methods described in this disclosure present elements of various steps using an exemplary order, and are not limited to the particular order presented.
 本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態は、Long Term Evolution(LTE)、LTE-Advanced(LTE-A)、LTE-Beyond(LTE-B)、SUPER 3G、IMT-Advanced、4th generation mobile communication system(4G)、5th generation mobile communication system(5G)、6th generation mobile communication system(6G)、xth generation mobile communication system(xG(xは、例えば整数、小数))、Future Radio Access(FRA)、New-Radio Access Technology(RAT)、New Radio(NR)、New radio access(NX)、Future generation radio access(FX)、Global System for Mobile communications(GSM(登録商標))、CDMA2000、Ultra Mobile Broadband(UMB)、IEEE 802.11(Wi-Fi(登録商標))、IEEE 802.16(WiMAX(登録商標))、IEEE 802.20、Ultra-WideBand(UWB)、Bluetooth(登録商標)、その他の適切な無線通信方法を利用するシステム、これらに基づいて拡張、修正、作成又は規定された次世代システムなどに適用されてもよい。また、複数のシステムが組み合わされて(例えば、LTE又はLTE-Aと、5Gとの組み合わせなど)適用されてもよい。 Each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure includes Long Term Evolution (LTE), LTE-Advanced (LTE-A), LTE-Beyond (LTE-B), SUPER 3G, IMT-Advanced, 4th generation mobile communication system (4G), 5th generation mobile communication system (5G), 6th generation mobile communication system (6G), xth generation mobile communication system (xG (x is, for example, an integer or decimal)), Future Radio Access (FRA), New-Radio The present invention may be applied to systems that use Access Technology (RAT), New Radio (NR), New radio access (NX), Future generation radio access (FX), Global System for Mobile communications (GSM (registered trademark)), CDMA2000, Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB), IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.20, Ultra-WideBand (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), and other appropriate wireless communication methods, as well as next-generation systems that are expanded, modified, created, or defined based on these. In addition, multiple systems may be combined (for example, a combination of LTE or LTE-A and 5G, etc.).
 本開示において使用する「に基づいて」という記載は、別段に明記されていない限り、「のみに基づいて」を意味しない。言い換えれば、「に基づいて」という記載は、「のみに基づいて」と「に少なくとも基づいて」の両方を意味する。 As used in this disclosure, the phrase "based on" does not mean "based only on," unless expressly stated otherwise. In other words, the phrase "based on" means both "based only on" and "based at least on."
 本開示において使用する「第1の」、「第2の」などの呼称を使用した要素へのいかなる参照も、それらの要素の量又は順序を全般的に限定しない。これらの呼称は、2つ以上の要素間を区別する便利な方法として本開示において使用され得る。したがって、第1及び第2の要素の参照は、2つの要素のみが採用され得ること又は何らかの形で第1の要素が第2の要素に先行しなければならないことを意味しない。 Any reference to elements using designations such as "first," "second," etc., used in this disclosure does not generally limit the quantity or order of those elements. These designations may be used in this disclosure as a convenient method of distinguishing between two or more elements. Thus, a reference to a first and second element does not imply that only two elements may be employed or that the first element must precede the second element in some way.
 本開示において使用する「判断(決定)(determining)」という用語は、多種多様な動作を包含する場合がある。例えば、「判断(決定)」は、判定(judging)、計算(calculating)、算出(computing)、処理(processing)、導出(deriving)、調査(investigating)、探索(looking up、search、inquiry)(例えば、テーブル、データベース又は別のデータ構造での探索)、確認(ascertaining)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。 The term "determining" as used in this disclosure may encompass a wide variety of actions. For example, "determining" may be considered to be judging, calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up, search, inquiry (e.g., looking in a table, database, or other data structure), ascertaining, etc.
 また、「判断(決定)」は、受信(receiving)(例えば、情報を受信すること)、送信(transmitting)(例えば、情報を送信すること)、入力(input)、出力(output)、アクセス(accessing)(例えば、メモリ中のデータにアクセスすること)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。 "Determining" may also be considered to mean "determining" receiving (e.g., receiving information), transmitting (e.g., sending information), input, output, accessing (e.g., accessing data in a memory), etc.
 また、「判断(決定)」は、解決(resolving)、選択(selecting)、選定(choosing)、確立(establishing)、比較(comparing)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。つまり、「判断(決定)」は、何らかの動作を「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。 "Judgment" may also be considered to mean "deciding" to resolve, select, choose, establish, compare, etc. In other words, "judgment" may also be considered to mean "deciding" to take some kind of action.
 また、「判断(決定)」は、「想定する(assuming)」、「期待する(expecting)」、「みなす(considering)」などで読み替えられてもよい。 In addition, "judgment (decision)" may be interpreted as "assuming," "expecting," "considering," etc.
 本開示に記載の「最大送信電力」は送信電力の最大値を意味してもよいし、公称最大送信電力(the nominal UE maximum transmit power)を意味してもよいし、定格最大送信電力(the rated UE maximum transmit power)を意味してもよい。 The "maximum transmit power" referred to in this disclosure may mean the maximum value of transmit power, may mean the nominal UE maximum transmit power, or may mean the rated UE maximum transmit power.
 本開示において使用する「接続された(connected)」、「結合された(coupled)」という用語、又はこれらのあらゆる変形は、2又はそれ以上の要素間の直接的又は間接的なあらゆる接続又は結合を意味し、互いに「接続」又は「結合」された2つの要素間に1又はそれ以上の中間要素が存在することを含むことができる。要素間の結合又は接続は、物理的であっても、論理的であっても、あるいはこれらの組み合わせであってもよい。例えば、「接続」は「アクセス」で読み替えられてもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the terms "connected" and "coupled," or any variation thereof, refer to any direct or indirect connection or coupling between two or more elements, and may include the presence of one or more intermediate elements between two elements that are "connected" or "coupled" to each other. The coupling or connection between the elements may be physical, logical, or a combination thereof. For example, "connected" may be read as "accessed."
 本開示において、2つの要素が接続される場合、1つ以上の電線、ケーブル、プリント電気接続などを用いて、並びにいくつかの非限定的かつ非包括的な例として、無線周波数領域、マイクロ波領域、光(可視及び不可視の両方)領域の波長を有する電磁エネルギーなどを用いて、互いに「接続」又は「結合」されると考えることができる。 In this disclosure, when two elements are connected, they may be considered to be "connected" or "coupled" to one another using one or more wires, cables, printed electrical connections, and the like, as well as using electromagnetic energy having wavelengths in the radio frequency range, microwave range, light (both visible and invisible) range, and the like, as some non-limiting and non-exhaustive examples.
 本開示において、「AとBが異なる」という用語は、「AとBが互いに異なる」ことを意味してもよい。なお、当該用語は、「AとBがそれぞれCと異なる」ことを意味してもよい。「離れる」、「結合される」などの用語も、「異なる」と同様に解釈されてもよい。 In this disclosure, the term "A and B are different" may mean "A and B are different from each other." The term may also mean "A and B are each different from C." Terms such as "separate" and "combined" may also be interpreted in the same way as "different."
 本開示において、「含む(include)」、「含んでいる(including)」及びこれらの変形が使用されている場合、これらの用語は、用語「備える(comprising)」と同様に、包括的であることが意図される。さらに、本開示において使用されている用語「又は(or)」は、排他的論理和ではないことが意図される。 When the terms "include," "including," and variations thereof are used in this disclosure, these terms are intended to be inclusive, similar to the term "comprising." Additionally, the term "or," as used in this disclosure, is not intended to be an exclusive or.
 本開示において、例えば、英語でのa, an及びtheのように、翻訳によって冠詞が追加された場合、本開示は、これらの冠詞の後に続く名詞が複数形であることを含んでもよい。 In this disclosure, where articles have been added through translation, such as a, an, and the in English, this disclosure may include that the nouns following these articles are plural.
 本開示において、「以下」、「未満」、「以上」、「より多い」、「と等しい」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「良い」、「悪い」、「大きい」、「小さい」、「高い」、「低い」、「早い」、「遅い」、「広い」、「狭い」、などを意味する文言は、原級、比較級及び最上級に限らず互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「良い」、「悪い」、「大きい」、「小さい」、「高い」、「低い」、「早い」、「遅い」、「広い」、「狭い」などを意味する文言は、「i番目に」(iは任意の整数)を付けた表現として、原級、比較級及び最上級に限らず互いに読み替えられてもよい(例えば、「最高」は「i番目に最高」と互いに読み替えられてもよい)。 In this disclosure, terms such as "less than", "less than", "greater than", "more than", "equal to", etc. may be read as interchangeable. In addition, in this disclosure, terms meaning "good", "bad", "big", "small", "high", "low", "fast", "slow", "wide", "narrow", etc. may be read as interchangeable, not limited to positive, comparative and superlative. In addition, in this disclosure, terms meaning "good", "bad", "big", "small", "high", "low", "fast", "slow", "wide", "narrow", etc. may be read as interchangeable, not limited to positive, comparative and superlative, as expressions with "ith" (i is any integer) (for example, "best" may be read as "ith best").
 本開示において、「の(of)」、「のための(for)」、「に関する(regarding)」、「に関係する(related to)」、「に関連付けられる(associated with)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms "of," "for," "regarding," "related to," "associated with," etc. may be read interchangeably.
 以上、本開示に係る発明について詳細に説明したが、当業者にとっては、本開示に係る発明が本開示中に説明した実施形態に限定されないということは明らかである。本開示に係る発明は、請求の範囲の記載に基づいて定まる発明の趣旨及び範囲を逸脱することなく修正及び変更態様として実施することができる。したがって、本開示の記載は、例示説明を目的とし、本開示に係る発明に対して何ら制限的な意味をもたらさない。  The invention disclosed herein has been described in detail above, but it is clear to those skilled in the art that the invention disclosed herein is not limited to the embodiments described herein. The invention disclosed herein can be implemented in modified and altered forms without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention as defined by the claims. Therefore, the description of the disclosure is intended as an illustrative example and does not impose any limiting meaning on the invention disclosed herein.
 本出願は、2022年10月17日出願の特願2022-166495に基づく。この内容は、全てここに含めておく。 This application is based on Patent Application No. 2022-166495, filed on October 17, 2022, the contents of which are incorporated herein in their entirety.

Claims (6)

  1.  レイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)シグナリングによりスペシャルセル(SpCell)のセルスイッチコマンドを受信する受信部と、
     候補セルのタイプに基づいて、当該候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスについて異なる想定を行う制御部と、
     を有する端末。
    a receiving unit for receiving a cell switch command of a special cell (SpCell) by Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling;
    a control unit that makes different assumptions about the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell;
    A terminal having the above configuration.
  2.  前記制御部は、前記候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスが変更されないと想定する
     請求項1に記載の端末。
    The terminal according to claim 1 , wherein the control unit assumes that an activation or deactivation status of the candidate cell is unchanged.
  3.  前記受信部は、前記候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化の指示を受信する
     請求項1に記載の端末。
    The terminal according to claim 1 , wherein the receiving unit receives an instruction to activate or deactivate the candidate cell.
  4.  前記受信部は、セルグループ内のサービングセルと候補セルについて、物理セルインデックス(PCI)の一部と関連するインデックスを受信する
     請求項1に記載の端末。
    The terminal according to claim 1 , wherein the receiving unit receives an index associated with a portion of a physical cell index (PCI) for a serving cell and a candidate cell in a cell group.
  5.  レイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)シグナリングによりスペシャルセル(SpCell)のセルスイッチコマンドを受信する工程と、
     候補セルのタイプに基づいて、当該候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスについて異なる想定を行う工程と、
     を有する端末の無線通信方法。
    receiving a cell switch command for a special cell (SpCell) via Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling;
    making different assumptions about the activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell;
    A wireless communication method for a terminal having the above configuration.
  6.  レイヤ1/レイヤ2(L1/L2)シグナリングによりスペシャルセル(SpCell)のセルスイッチコマンドを送信する送信部と、
     候補セルのタイプに基づいて、当該候補セルのアクティブ化または非アクティブ化のステータスについて異なる制御を行う制御部と、
     を有する基地局。
    A transmitter that transmits a cell switch command of a special cell (SpCell) by Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) signaling;
    A control unit that performs different control on an activation or deactivation status of a candidate cell based on the type of the candidate cell;
    A base station having
PCT/JP2023/037483 2022-10-17 2023-10-17 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station WO2024085129A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022-166495 2022-10-17
JP2022166495 2022-10-17

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024085129A1 true WO2024085129A1 (en) 2024-04-25

Family

ID=90737830

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/037483 WO2024085129A1 (en) 2022-10-17 2023-10-17 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024085129A1 (en)

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
INTERDIGITAL, INC.: "L1/2 handover trigger.", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2210194, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG2, no. Online; 20221010 - 20221019, 30 September 2022 (2022-09-30), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052263517 *
NTT DOCOMO, INC.: "Discussion on L1 enhancements for inter-cell mobility", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2209923, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20221010 - 20221019, 30 September 2022 (2022-09-30), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052259396 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2024085129A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024085128A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024075273A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024080025A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024080024A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024018609A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024018608A1 (en) Terminal, radio communication method, and base station
WO2024009475A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024009473A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024009474A1 (en) Terminal, radio communication method, and base station
WO2024034086A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024034085A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024069968A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024100733A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024095477A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024095478A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2023053258A1 (en) Terminal, radio communication method, and base station
WO2023053259A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2023037432A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method and base station
WO2023090340A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2023073930A1 (en) Terminal, radio communication method, and base station
WO2024095414A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024095363A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024095416A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024095364A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station